1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
46 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
47 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
49 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
51 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
52 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
64 \font_typewriter default
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
73 \default_output_format default
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation indent
133 \paragraph_indentation default
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes false
139 \output_changes false
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
162 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
173 \begin_inset Newline newline
177 \begin_inset Newline newline
181 \begin_inset Note Note
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
185 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
199 \begin_layout Standard
200 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
201 LatexCommand tableofcontents
208 \begin_layout Chapter
212 \begin_layout Section
216 \begin_layout Standard
217 LyX is a document preparation system.
218 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
219 scripts, publishable books, business
220 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
221 It is unlike most other
222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
229 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
231 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
247 pt type, left justified, 5
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
260 \begin_layout Standard
261 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
266 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
270 \begin_layout Standard
275 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
276 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
277 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
278 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
284 manual describes that, too.
287 \begin_layout Section
291 \begin_layout Standard
292 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
294 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
295 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
301 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
302 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
304 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
305 only a vertical scrollbar.
306 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
307 The first case is large images.
308 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
309 image and use the option
315 LaTeX and LyX options
318 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
320 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
321 this doesn't work for equations yet.
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
333 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
340 \begin_layout Section
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
346 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
347 Just select the manual you want to read from the
354 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
358 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
368 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
372 \begin_inset Index idx
375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
381 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
382 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
383 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
385 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
386 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
391 \begin_inset space \space{}
394 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
395 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
397 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
401 \begin_inset Index idx
404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 Reconfiguration of LyX
410 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
413 \begin_layout Section
415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
417 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
424 \begin_layout Standard
425 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
426 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
428 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
429 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
436 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
437 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
440 \begin_layout Standard
441 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
442 you can view from the menu
444 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
464 reconfigure LyX (menu
466 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
470 \begin_inset Note Note
473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
474 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
482 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
483 More about TeX Code is described in section
488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
490 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
494 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
501 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
511 \begin_inset Index idx
514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
515 Reconfiguration of LyX
520 See section 5.1 of the
524 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
527 \begin_layout Chapter
531 \begin_layout Section
532 Basic File Operations
533 \begin_inset Index idx
536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
545 \begin_layout Standard
550 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
551 in addition to some more advanced operations:
554 \begin_layout Itemize
576 \begin_layout Itemize
592 arg "buffer-new-template"
598 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
630 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
678 arg "buffer-write-as"
684 \begin_layout Itemize
698 \begin_layout Itemize
706 arg "dialog-show print"
714 arg "dialog-show print"
720 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Standard
735 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
736 a few minor differences.
739 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
750 command lists the available templates.
751 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
752 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
753 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
761 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
768 \begin_layout Standard
769 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
802 space is just that — a big, blank space.
810 \begin_layout Standard
831 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
836 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
838 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
856 will reload the document from disk.
857 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
858 and want to restore it to the last save.
867 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
868 them as your changes.
871 \begin_layout Section
872 Basic Editing Features
873 \begin_inset Index idx
876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
885 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
892 \begin_layout Standard
893 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
894 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
895 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
896 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
898 We will start with cut and paste.
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 As you might expect, the
906 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
907 various other editing features.
908 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
912 \begin_layout Itemize
918 \begin_inset Index idx
921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
950 \begin_layout Itemize
956 \begin_inset Index idx
959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
988 \begin_layout Itemize
994 \begin_inset Index idx
997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_layout Itemize
1036 \begin_inset space ~
1042 \begin_layout Itemize
1046 \begin_inset space ~
1050 \begin_inset space ~
1056 \begin_inset Index idx
1059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1068 \begin_inset Index idx
1071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1086 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1096 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1103 The first three are self-explanatory.
1104 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1125 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1126 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1131 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1132 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1133 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1134 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1135 into individual cells.
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1144 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1145 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1149 \begin_layout Standard
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1158 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1160 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1161 \begin_inset space ~
1168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1174 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1175 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1176 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space \space{}
1185 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1186 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1189 \begin_inset space ~
1192 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1211 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1212 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1214 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1223 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1224 start a new paragraph.
1225 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1233 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1250 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1253 paste from the primary selection.
1254 This is normally the currently selected text.
1257 \begin_layout Standard
1260 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1266 \begin_inset space ~
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1278 \begin_inset space ~
1284 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1289 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 button to skip the current word.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1319 \begin_inset space ~
1324 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1326 If the toggle is set, searching for
1327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1338 will not match the word
1339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 Match whole words only
1355 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1384 LyX offers also an advanced
1387 \begin_inset space ~
1391 \begin_inset space ~
1396 feature that is described in sec.
1397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1403 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1410 \begin_layout Standard
1411 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1412 \begin_inset space \space{}
1416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1424 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1426 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1431 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1438 \begin_layout Standard
1439 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1442 arg "inset-select-all"
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document.
1454 \begin_layout Section
1456 \begin_inset Index idx
1459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1466 \begin_inset Index idx
1469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1478 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in LyX.
1554 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1558 \begin_layout Section
1560 \begin_inset Index idx
1563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1572 \begin_layout Standard
1573 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1576 \begin_layout Enumerate
1581 \begin_layout Itemize
1586 once anywhere in the edit window.
1587 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1591 \begin_layout Enumerate
1596 \begin_layout Itemize
1602 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1605 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1608 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1611 \begin_layout Itemize
1612 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1614 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1621 \begin_layout Enumerate
1622 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1628 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1632 \begin_layout Section
1634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1636 name "sec:Navigating"
1641 \begin_inset Index idx
1644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1653 \begin_layout Standard
1654 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1726 \begin_layout Subsection
1728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1730 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1737 \begin_layout Standard
1738 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1739 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1740 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1748 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1752 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1759 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1764 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1770 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1771 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1772 dialog and to modify the citation.
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1776 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1778 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1779 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1787 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1792 you further to control the display.
1797 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1798 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1804 option keeps it in the current view state.
1805 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1809 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1810 \begin_inset space ~
1813 3, the subsections of sections
1814 \begin_inset space ~
1817 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1822 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1823 \begin_inset space ~
1827 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1837 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1840 \begin_layout Standard
1842 \begin_inset space \space{}
1846 \begin_inset Graphics
1847 filename ../images/reload.png
1852 \begin_inset space ~
1855 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1856 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1859 \begin_inset space \space{}
1863 \begin_inset Graphics
1864 filename ../images/down.png
1866 groupId toolbarbuttons
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 \begin_inset space \space{}
1879 \begin_inset Graphics
1880 filename ../images/up.png
1882 groupId toolbarbuttons
1887 \begin_inset space ~
1890 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1891 So, for example, you can move section
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1899 2.4 or after section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1906 \begin_inset Graphics
1907 filename ../images/promote.png
1909 groupId toolbarbuttons
1914 \begin_inset Graphics
1915 filename ../images/demote.png
1917 groupId toolbarbuttons
1921 (or the corresponding key bindings
1929 ) you can change the level of sections.
1930 So you can for example make section
1931 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_layout Section
1946 Input/Word Completion
1947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1949 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1954 \begin_inset Index idx
1957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1998 \begin_layout Standard
1999 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2001 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2002 is used to propose completions.
2005 \begin_layout Standard
2006 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2008 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2013 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2020 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2029 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2033 \begin_inset space ~
2038 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2039 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2043 \begin_inset space ~
2049 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2050 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2055 are completions available.
2060 key to accept a proposed completion.
2061 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2062 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2063 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2070 \begin_layout Standard
2071 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2072 ing options for text.
2073 The special math option
2077 enables characters to be composed.
2078 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2079 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2082 , you can then input the characters
2083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2094 to a formula to get it.
2095 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2096 of the math toolbar.
2097 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2101 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2102 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2111 \begin_layout Section
2113 \begin_inset Index idx
2116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2123 \begin_inset Index idx
2126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset Index idx
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2203 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2205 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2209 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2216 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2223 \begin_layout Standard
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2235 \begin_inset space ~
2256 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2260 \begin_layout Labeling
2261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2265 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2266 LatexCommand nomenclature
2268 description "Tabulator key"
2274 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2275 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2276 \begin_inset space ~
2280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2282 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2289 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2293 , especially section
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2300 reference "sub:Lists"
2306 If you are still confused, look in the
2311 \begin_inset Newline newline
2318 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2319 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2323 \begin_layout Labeling
2324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2328 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2329 LatexCommand nomenclature
2331 description "Escape key"
2338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2345 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2346 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2349 \begin_layout Labeling
2350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2356 \begin_inset space ~
2360 \begin_inset space ~
2367 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2368 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2372 \begin_layout Standard
2373 There are three modifier keys:
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2395 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2396 LatexCommand nomenclature
2398 description "Control key"
2402 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2403 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2407 \begin_layout Itemize
2416 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2419 \begin_layout Itemize
2428 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2431 \begin_layout Itemize
2440 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2444 \begin_layout Labeling
2445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2464 LatexCommand nomenclature
2466 description "Shift key"
2470 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2471 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2474 \begin_layout Labeling
2475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2493 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2494 LatexCommand nomenclature
2496 description "Alt or Meta key"
2500 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2501 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2502 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2508 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2513 menu accelerator keys
2516 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2517 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2522 For example, the sequence
2523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2539 \begin_inset space ~
2547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2582 \begin_layout Standard
2587 manual lists all other things bound to the
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2596 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2597 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2598 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2599 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2600 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2601 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2602 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2604 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2620 followed by a capital
2627 \begin_layout Chapter
2629 \begin_inset Index idx
2632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2641 \begin_layout Section
2643 \begin_inset Index idx
2646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_layout Subsection
2659 \begin_layout Standard
2660 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2661 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2662 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2663 numbering schemes, and so on.
2664 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2665 and format the title of your document differently.
2668 \begin_layout Standard
2673 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2674 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2675 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2676 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2677 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2682 \begin_inset Index idx
2685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2694 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2701 \begin_layout Standard
2702 You can select a class using the
2704 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2705 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2709 \begin_inset Index idx
2712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2732 \begin_layout Description
2733 Article for basic articles
2736 \begin_layout Description
2737 Report for basic reports
2740 \begin_layout Description
2741 Book for writing a book
2744 \begin_layout Description
2745 Letter for US-style letters
2748 \begin_layout Standard
2749 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2750 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2751 will include many of these.
2752 Here are some of the classes.
2753 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2755 Special Document Classes
2764 \begin_layout Description
2765 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2768 \begin_layout Description
2769 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2780 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2781 There are three article layouts available.
2782 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2783 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2784 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2785 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2790 sequential numbering
2791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2794 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2795 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2796 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2797 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2800 \begin_layout Description
2801 Beamer Layout for presentations
2804 \begin_layout Description
2805 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2806 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2814 \begin_layout Description
2816 \begin_inset space ~
2819 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2822 \begin_layout Description
2823 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2826 \begin_layout Description
2827 Foils Used to make transparencies
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2832 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2836 \begin_layout Description
2837 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2838 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2845 \begin_layout Description
2846 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2851 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2852 (Is used by this document.)
2855 \begin_layout Description
2856 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2859 \begin_layout Description
2860 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2863 \begin_layout Description
2868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2875 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2876 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2878 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2881 \begin_layout Description
2882 Slides Used to make transparencies
2885 \begin_layout Description
2887 \begin_inset space ~
2890 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2891 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2894 \begin_layout Description
2895 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2898 \begin_layout Standard
2899 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2901 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2907 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2908 of the document classes.
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2918 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2919 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2921 \begin_inset Index idx
2924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2941 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2942 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2944 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2947 \begin_layout Standard
2949 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2950 and some of them, like
2954 , are highly specialized.
2955 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2956 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2958 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2959 by some document class.
2960 There are just too many of them.
2961 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2964 \begin_layout Standard
2965 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2973 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2974 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2975 document class for a new file.
2976 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2981 Installing new LaTeX files
2982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2989 manual for information on how to install them.
2990 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2996 \begin_layout Standard
2997 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2998 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3000 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3001 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3002 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3004 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3008 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3014 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3026 \begin_inset Index idx
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3038 \begin_layout Standard
3039 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3040 chosen document class.
3041 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3042 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3049 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3053 \begin_inset Index idx
3056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3067 \begin_layout Standard
3068 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3069 always installed by default.
3070 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3071 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3072 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3073 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3074 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3075 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3076 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3079 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3083 \begin_inset Index idx
3086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3087 Reconfiguration of LyX
3093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3096 Installing new LaTeX files
3097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3104 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3107 \begin_layout Standard
3108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3117 LyX will advise you about these things.
3125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3129 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3134 \begin_inset Index idx
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3138 Document ! Local Layout
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3148 used in a variety of different documents.
3149 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3150 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3151 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3152 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3153 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3154 What you want is LyX's
3155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3171 manual for information on how to use it.
3174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3178 \begin_layout Standard
3179 Each class has a default set of options.
3180 Here's a quick table describing them:
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3190 \begin_layout Standard
3192 \begin_inset Tabular
3193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3194 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3653 \begin_layout Standard
3654 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3660 \begin_layout Standard
3661 You're probably also wondering what
3662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3666 \begin_inset space ~
3670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3674 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3675 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3680 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3685 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3695 headings, there are also
3703 headings, and so on.
3704 We will describe these headings fully in section
3705 \begin_inset space ~
3709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3711 reference "sub:Headings"
3718 \begin_layout Subsection
3720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3722 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3727 \begin_inset Index idx
3730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 \begin_inset Index idx
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 \begin_layout Standard
3752 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3754 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3761 \begin_inset space ~
3769 \begin_inset space ~
3774 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3776 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3777 to use for your document.
3778 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3782 \begin_layout Standard
3786 \begin_inset space ~
3793 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3799 \begin_inset space ~
3804 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3805 You can choose between the following five options:
3808 \begin_layout Labeling
3809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3814 Use default page style of current class.
3817 \begin_layout Labeling
3818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3823 No page numbers or headings.
3826 \begin_layout Labeling
3827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3835 \begin_layout Labeling
3836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3841 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3842 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3843 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3846 \begin_layout Labeling
3847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3852 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3853 have the LaTeX-package
3858 \begin_inset Index idx
3861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3862 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3868 How they are defined is explained in section
3869 \begin_inset space ~
3873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3875 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3882 \begin_layout Standard
3883 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3884 \begin_inset space ~
3888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3890 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3897 \begin_layout Subsection
3898 Paper Size and Orientation
3899 \begin_inset Index idx
3902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3903 Document ! Paper size
3909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3911 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3918 \begin_layout Standard
3919 You can find the following options in the menu
3922 \begin_inset space ~
3929 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Labeling
3948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3952 \begin_inset space ~
3957 What size paper to print on.
3962 \begin_layout Itemize
3968 \begin_layout Itemize
3974 \begin_layout Itemize
3980 \begin_layout Itemize
3986 \begin_layout Itemize
3989 US letter, US legal, US executive
3992 \begin_layout Itemize
3998 \begin_layout Itemize
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 To choose whether to output as
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 \begin_inset space ~
4032 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4033 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4036 \begin_layout Subsection
4038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4045 \begin_inset Index idx
4048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4055 \begin_inset Index idx
4058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 \begin_layout Standard
4068 Paper margins are set in the menu
4070 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4074 \begin_inset Index idx
4077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 \begin_layout Standard
4087 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4088 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4089 the paper format and the font size into account.
4092 \begin_layout Subsection
4096 \begin_layout Standard
4097 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4102 That includes the paragraph environments.
4103 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4104 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4105 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4106 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4115 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4117 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4118 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4119 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4122 \begin_layout Section
4123 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4128 Paragraph ! Indentation
4136 \begin_layout Subsection
4138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4140 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4147 \begin_layout Standard
4148 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4149 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4152 \begin_layout Standard
4153 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4154 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4155 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4156 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4160 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4166 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4167 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4168 language than English.
4169 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4173 \begin_layout Standard
4174 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4175 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4177 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4178 LyX takes care of that.
4179 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4181 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4182 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4183 of a page, and so on.
4187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4188 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4193 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4194 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4198 these pre-coded spacings.
4199 We will explain more later.
4202 \begin_layout Subsection
4203 Paragraph Separation
4204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4206 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4211 \begin_inset Index idx
4214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4215 Paragraph ! Separation
4223 \begin_layout Standard
4231 \begin_inset space ~
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4250 \begin_inset Index idx
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4259 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4262 \begin_layout Subsection
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4270 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4272 \begin_inset space ~
4277 dialog and toggle the
4280 \begin_inset space ~
4285 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4288 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4292 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4293 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4297 \begin_layout Standard
4298 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4299 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4302 \begin_layout Subsection
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4308 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4316 \begin_layout Standard
4319 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4323 \begin_inset Index idx
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4335 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4339 \begin_inset space ~
4348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4349 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4354 \begin_inset Index idx
4357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4358 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4363 installed to use this feature.
4368 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4370 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset space ~
4377 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4378 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4381 \begin_layout Section
4382 Paragraph Environments
4383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4385 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4390 \begin_inset Index idx
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4394 Paragraph ! Environments
4400 \begin_inset Index idx
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 Paragraph environments|(
4412 \begin_layout Subsection
4416 \begin_layout Standard
4417 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4439 \begin_inset Newline newline
4442 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4443 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4444 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4453 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4456 \begin_layout Standard
4457 A paragraph environment is simply a
4458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4465 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4466 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4467 scheme, labels, and so on.
4468 Additionally, you can
4469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4476 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4477 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4478 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4479 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4481 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4483 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4488 \begin_inset Graphics
4489 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4495 at the left end of the toolbar.
4496 LyX will change the environment of the
4500 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4501 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4502 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4506 \begin_layout Standard
4515 create a new paragraph using the
4519 paragraph environment.
4521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4528 because if you are in one of these environments:
4531 \begin_layout Itemize
4537 \begin_layout Itemize
4543 \begin_layout Itemize
4549 \begin_layout Itemize
4555 \begin_layout Itemize
4561 \begin_layout Itemize
4567 \begin_layout Itemize
4573 \begin_layout Standard
4574 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4578 , rather than resetting it to
4583 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4584 \begin_inset space ~
4588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4590 reference "sec:Nesting"
4597 \begin_layout Subsection
4601 \begin_layout Standard
4602 The default paragraph environment is
4607 It creates a plain paragraph.
4608 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4609 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4610 this manual) are in the
4617 \begin_layout Standard
4618 You can nest a paragraph using the
4622 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4630 \begin_layout Subsection
4632 \begin_inset Index idx
4635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4645 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4654 for thanks or contact information.
4655 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4656 page along with today's date.
4657 For other types of documents, the title
4658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4665 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4669 \begin_layout Standard
4670 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4684 Here's how you use them:
4687 \begin_layout Itemize
4688 Put the title of your document in the
4695 \begin_layout Itemize
4696 Put the author name in the
4703 \begin_layout Itemize
4704 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4705 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4711 Note that using this environment is optional.
4712 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4713 If you don't want a date, use the option
4715 Suppress default date on front page
4719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4720 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4722 \begin_inset space ~
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4731 You can use footnotes to insert
4732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4739 or contact information.
4742 \begin_layout Subsection
4744 \begin_inset Index idx
4747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4763 \begin_layout Standard
4764 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4765 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4770 \begin_inset Index idx
4773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4774 Section headings ! Numbered
4782 \begin_layout Standard
4783 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4787 \begin_layout Enumerate
4793 \begin_layout Enumerate
4799 \begin_layout Enumerate
4805 \begin_layout Enumerate
4811 \begin_layout Enumerate
4817 \begin_layout Enumerate
4823 \begin_layout Enumerate
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4831 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4832 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4837 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4838 You group the book into chapters.
4839 LyX does a similar grouping:
4842 \begin_layout Itemize
4847 is divided into either
4858 \begin_layout Itemize
4870 \begin_layout Itemize
4882 \begin_layout Itemize
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4927 Not all document types use the
4931 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4936 is the top-level heading.
4944 \begin_layout Standard
4949 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4950 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4952 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4966 \begin_inset Index idx
4969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4970 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4978 \begin_layout Standard
4979 The unnumbered section headings have a
4980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4987 at the end of their name.
4988 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4989 the table of contents, see section
4990 \begin_inset space ~
4994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 Changing the Numbering
5005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5007 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5014 \begin_layout Standard
5015 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5016 in the Table of Contents.
5017 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5019 Just as certain classes start with
5033 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5043 This is something you can change.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5049 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5053 \begin_inset Index idx
5056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5065 \begin_inset space ~
5069 \begin_inset space ~
5074 you will see two counters.
5079 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5081 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5086 Short Titles of Headings
5087 \begin_inset Index idx
5090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5091 Section headings ! Short titles
5097 \begin_inset Argument 1
5100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5109 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5116 \begin_layout Standard
5117 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5118 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5119 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5120 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5123 \begin_layout Standard
5124 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5125 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5126 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5127 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5130 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5138 This will insert a box labeled
5139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5143 \begin_inset space ~
5147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5150 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5151 This also works for captions inside floats.
5152 There can only be one short title per title.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5164 The following information applies to all section headings:
5167 \begin_layout Itemize
5168 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5171 \begin_layout Itemize
5172 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5175 \begin_layout Itemize
5176 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5179 \begin_layout Itemize
5180 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5183 \begin_layout Subsection
5184 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5187 \begin_layout Standard
5188 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5202 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5203 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5204 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5205 the text they contain.
5206 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5214 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5218 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5227 when you start a new paragraph.
5228 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5232 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5233 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5234 have to change back to the
5238 environment yourself.
5241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5258 \begin_inset Index idx
5261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5272 time for the differences.
5281 are identical except for one difference:
5285 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5294 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5297 \begin_layout Standard
5298 Here's an example of the
5311 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5313 See – no indentation!
5317 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5318 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5319 the other paragraph.
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5323 Here's another example, this time in the
5330 \begin_layout Quotation
5336 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5337 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5338 the first line, then
5342 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5346 you were quoting other text.
5349 \begin_layout Quotation
5350 Here's a new paragraph.
5351 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5352 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5355 \begin_layout Standard
5356 As the examples show,
5360 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5361 They should put quotes in the
5366 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5370 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5379 \begin_inset Index idx
5382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5391 \begin_inset Index idx
5394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5415 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5421 \begin_inset Newline newline
5424 Which I did not rehearse!
5428 It could be much worse.
5429 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5431 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5432 indented a bit more than the first.
5433 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5439 \begin_inset Newline newline
5442 And make things look fine
5443 \begin_inset Newline newline
5449 arg "newline-insert newline"
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5460 does not indent both margins.
5461 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5462 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5469 arg "newline-insert newline"
5475 \begin_layout Subsection
5477 \begin_inset Index idx
5480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 \begin_layout Standard
5497 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5507 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5516 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5517 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5518 describing some general features of all four of them.
5521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5525 \begin_layout Standard
5526 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5528 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5537 reset the environment to
5541 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5542 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5543 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5547 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5551 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5558 \begin_layout Standard
5559 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5560 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5562 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5563 you read all of section
5564 \begin_inset space ~
5568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5570 reference "sec:Nesting"
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5583 \begin_inset Index idx
5586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5602 \begin_layout Standard
5603 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5607 paragraph environment.
5608 It has the following properties:
5611 \begin_layout Itemize
5612 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5616 \begin_layout Itemize
5617 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5620 \begin_layout Itemize
5621 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5625 \begin_layout Itemize
5626 The items can have any length.
5627 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5628 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5640 environment inside another
5644 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5648 \begin_layout Itemize
5649 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5652 \begin_layout Itemize
5653 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5656 \begin_layout Itemize
5658 \begin_inset space ~
5662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5664 reference "sec:Nesting"
5668 for a full explanation of nesting.
5672 \begin_layout Standard
5673 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5682 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5685 \begin_layout Standard
5686 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5687 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 The label for the first level
5695 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5699 \begin_layout Itemize
5700 The label for the second level is a dash.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5709 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 Back out to the third level.
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5720 Back to the second level.
5724 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 Back to the outermost level.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 These are the default labels for an
5734 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5736 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5739 dialog in the submenu
5744 \begin_inset Index idx
5747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5758 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5760 \begin_inset space ~
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5766 reference "sec:Nesting"
5773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5779 \begin_inset Index idx
5782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5791 name "sec:Enumerate"
5798 \begin_layout Standard
5803 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5804 It has these properties:
5807 \begin_layout Enumerate
5808 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5812 \begin_layout Enumerate
5813 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5821 \begin_layout Enumerate
5826 environment resets the counter to one.
5829 \begin_layout Enumerate
5842 \begin_layout Enumerate
5843 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5844 Items can have any length.
5847 \begin_layout Enumerate
5848 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5851 \begin_layout Enumerate
5852 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5855 \begin_layout Enumerate
5856 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5860 \begin_layout Standard
5869 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5870 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5877 \begin_layout Enumerate
5878 The first level of an
5882 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5900 \begin_layout Enumerate
5901 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Back to the third level
5911 \begin_layout Enumerate
5912 Back to the second level.
5916 \begin_layout Enumerate
5917 Back to the outermost level.
5920 \begin_layout Standard
5921 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5925 environment, see section
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5932 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5937 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5940 \begin_layout Standard
5941 There is more to nesting
5945 environments than we've stated here.
5946 You should read section
5947 \begin_inset space ~
5951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5953 reference "sec:Nesting"
5957 to learn more about nesting.
5960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5966 \begin_inset Index idx
5969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_layout Standard
5979 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5983 list has no fixed label.
5984 Instead, LyX uses the first
5985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5992 of the first line as the label.
5996 \begin_layout Description
5997 Example: This is an example of the
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6005 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6009 \begin_layout Standard
6011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6018 it is meant that the first usage of the
6022 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6024 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6032 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
6037 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6038 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6040 \begin_inset space ~
6046 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6052 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6056 for more information.) Here is an example:
6059 \begin_layout Description
6061 \begin_inset space ~
6064 Example: This one shows how to use a
6067 \begin_inset space ~
6079 \begin_layout Description
6080 Usage: You should use the
6084 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6085 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6087 It's not a good idea to use a
6091 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6092 You're better off using
6104 paragraphs into them.
6107 \begin_layout Description
6108 Nesting: You can nest
6112 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6116 \begin_layout Standard
6117 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6118 them from the first line.
6121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6123 \begin_inset Index idx
6126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6140 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6152 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6154 Here are its properties:
6157 \begin_layout Labeling
6158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6160 \begin_inset space ~
6163 labels LyX uses the first
6164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6171 of each line as the item label.
6176 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6177 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6178 space as described above.
6181 \begin_layout Labeling
6182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6183 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6184 the body of the item text.
6185 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6186 label width plus a little extra space.
6190 \begin_layout Labeling
6191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6193 \begin_inset space ~
6196 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6198 If the label width is larger, the label
6199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6206 into the first line.
6207 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6208 margin of the rest of the item text.
6211 \begin_layout Labeling
6212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6214 \begin_inset space ~
6217 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6222 environment has the same left margin.
6223 \begin_inset Newline newline
6226 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6229 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6231 \begin_inset space ~
6236 dialog (toolbar button
6239 arg "layout-paragraph"
6246 \begin_inset space ~
6251 determines the default label width.
6252 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6261 multiple times instead.
6262 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6271 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6279 every time you alter a label in a
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 The predefined default width is the length of
6288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6296 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Standard
6307 list the same way as the
6311 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6317 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6321 \begin_layout Standard
6326 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6327 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6329 \begin_inset space ~
6333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6335 reference "sec:Nesting"
6339 to learn about nesting.
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 There is yet another feature of the
6347 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6349 You can use additional
6353 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6358 are documented in section
6359 \begin_inset space ~
6363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6365 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6370 Here are some examples:
6373 \begin_layout Labeling
6374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6375 Left The default for
6382 \begin_layout Labeling
6383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6384 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6391 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6400 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6407 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6410 \begin_layout Subsection
6412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6414 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6419 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 \begin_layout Standard
6432 The features described in this section require that the module
6434 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6436 is loaded in the document settings.
6437 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6442 \begin_inset Index idx
6445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6446 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6455 Custom Enumerate Lists
6456 \begin_inset Index idx
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6460 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6468 \begin_layout Standard
6470 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6473 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6476 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6477 There you add the command
6480 \begin_layout Standard
6488 \begin_layout Standard
6489 in TeX Code (shortcut
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6500 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6507 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6520 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6527 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6528 For capital Roman numerals replace
6540 in the command above.
6541 For Arabic numerals use
6549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6556 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 You can only number 26
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6585 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6593 \begin_layout Standard
6594 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6595 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6598 \begin_layout Standard
6599 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6602 \begin_layout Enumerate
6603 \begin_inset Argument 1
6606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 \begin_layout Enumerate
6633 \begin_inset Argument 1
6636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6659 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_layout Enumerate
6665 \begin_inset Argument 1
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 \begin_layout Enumerate
6693 \begin_inset Argument 1
6696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6723 For this list these commands were used:
6726 \begin_layout Standard
6737 \begin_inset Newline newline
6745 \begin_inset Newline newline
6753 \begin_inset Newline newline
6763 \begin_layout Standard
6770 makes the label emphasized and
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6788 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6789 lists until you change the definition.
6797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6799 \begin_inset Index idx
6802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6803 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6815 \begin_layout Enumerate
6816 \begin_inset Argument 1
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_inset Note Note
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 goes back to default numbering
6850 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6858 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6868 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6869 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6889 \begin_layout Standard
6890 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6892 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6893 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6894 of a normal enumeration.
6895 There, insert the command
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6909 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6917 \begin_layout Enumerate
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6922 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6926 \begin_inset Argument 1
6929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6945 This enumeration starts at 4
6948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6950 \begin_inset Index idx
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6963 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6965 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6968 \begin_layout Itemize
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6973 with standard spacing
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6979 Add there the command
6983 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6986 \begin_layout Itemize
6987 \begin_inset Argument 1
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 \begin_layout Itemize
7013 \begin_layout Itemize
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7024 \begin_inset Index idx
7027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7028 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7034 For more information see its documentation,
7035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7045 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7047 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7048 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7052 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7055 \begin_layout Enumerate
7056 \begin_inset Argument 1
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7067 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7080 \begin_layout Enumerate
7081 with negative indentation
7084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7085 Further Customization
7086 \begin_inset Index idx
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7090 Lists ! Customization
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 You can also change the style of description lists.
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 changes the description label font, the command
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7120 sets the list style.
7123 \begin_layout Standard
7124 An example where the command
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7132 itshape, style=nextline
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7139 \begin_layout Description
7141 \begin_inset space ~
7145 \begin_inset Argument 1
7148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7154 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7156 itshape, style=nextline
7166 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7167 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7171 \begin_layout Description
7173 \begin_inset space ~
7176 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7177 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7178 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7192 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7198 For more information see its documentation
7199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7208 \begin_layout Subsection
7210 \begin_inset Index idx
7213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7230 \begin_inset space ~
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7239 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7247 \begin_inset space ~
7253 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7254 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7255 In contrast, you can use the
7262 \begin_inset space ~
7267 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7268 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7273 Of course, you're not limited to using
7280 \begin_inset space ~
7289 \begin_inset space ~
7294 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7295 some European academic papers.
7298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7302 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7314 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7315 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7319 \begin_inset space ~
7324 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7325 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7326 Here's an example of each:
7329 \begin_layout Right Address
7331 \begin_inset Newline newline
7335 \begin_inset Newline newline
7339 \begin_inset Newline newline
7342 When is it? What is today?
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7349 \begin_inset space ~
7355 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7356 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7357 Here's an example of the
7364 \begin_layout Address
7366 \begin_inset Newline newline
7369 Where do I send this
7370 \begin_inset Newline newline
7373 Your post office and country
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7377 As you can see, both
7384 \begin_inset space ~
7389 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7394 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7400 This makes sense, since
7408 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7409 Thus, you have to use
7416 arg "newline-insert newline"
7421 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7422 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7428 \begin_inset space ~
7433 ) to start a new line in an
7440 \begin_inset space ~
7448 \begin_layout Subsection
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7454 or list of references.
7455 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7462 \begin_inset Index idx
7465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7479 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7480 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7481 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7482 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7496 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7497 The book document classes ignores the
7501 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7505 in a letter document class.
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7513 environment does several things for you.
7514 First, it puts the centered label
7515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7523 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7525 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7526 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7527 the subsequent text.
7528 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7529 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7533 \begin_layout Standard
7534 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7538 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7539 The new paragraph will still be in the
7544 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7545 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7549 \begin_inset Float figure
7554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7556 \begin_inset Graphics
7557 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7565 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7570 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7591 \begin_layout Standard
7592 We would love to demonstrate the
7596 environment, but since this document is in the
7597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7604 class, we can't do this.
7605 We inserted it therefore as figure
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7612 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7617 If you have never heard of an
7618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7625 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7634 \begin_inset Index idx
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7646 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7653 \begin_layout Standard
7658 environment is used to list references.
7659 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7660 only use it at the end of the document.
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7673 When you first open a
7677 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7693 depending on the document class.
7694 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7695 Each paragraph of the
7699 environment is a bibliography entry.
7704 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7705 Each new paragraph is still in the
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7713 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7714 by using a BibTeX database.
7715 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7716 phy handling, have a look at section
7717 \begin_inset space ~
7721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7723 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7730 \begin_layout Subsection
7734 \begin_inset Index idx
7737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7738 Paragraph ! LyX code
7744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7758 environment is another LyX extension.
7759 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7764 key as a fixed whitespace;
7768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7780 \begin_inset space ~
7785 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7790 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7791 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7794 arg "newline-insert newline"
7811 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7812 So, when you finish using the
7816 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7817 Also, you can nest the
7821 environment inside of others.
7824 \begin_layout Standard
7825 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7828 \begin_layout Itemize
7832 arg "newline-insert newline"
7835 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7840 \begin_inset space \space{}
7850 arg "newline-insert newline"
7856 \begin_layout Itemize
7860 arg "newline-insert newline"
7871 \begin_layout Itemize
7876 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7883 \begin_layout Itemize
7887 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7894 \begin_layout Itemize
7895 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7896 You must put at least one
7900 in any line you want blank.
7901 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7904 \begin_layout Itemize
7905 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7909 since that will insert
7914 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7917 arg "self-insert \""
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7927 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7931 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7935 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7939 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7943 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7944 printf("Hello World!
7949 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7953 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7957 \begin_layout Standard
7958 This is just the standard
7959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7970 \begin_layout Standard
7975 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7976 rc-files, and so on.
7977 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7978 as if you used a typewriter.
7979 \begin_inset Index idx
7982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7983 Paragraph environments|)
7988 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7991 Program Code Listings
7996 \begin_inset space ~
8004 \begin_layout Section
8005 Nesting Environments
8006 \begin_inset Index idx
8009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8010 Nesting ! Environments
8016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8025 \begin_layout Subsection
8029 \begin_layout Standard
8030 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8032 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8034 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8036 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8048 \begin_layout Enumerate
8052 \begin_layout Enumerate
8057 \begin_layout Enumerate
8061 \begin_layout Enumerate
8066 \begin_layout Enumerate
8070 \begin_layout Standard
8071 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8072 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8074 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8076 \begin_inset space ~
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8092 \begin_inset space ~
8097 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8099 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8102 arg "depth-increment"
8108 arg "depth-decrement"
8122 arg "depth-increment"
8128 arg "depth-decrement"
8132 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8133 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8137 \begin_layout Standard
8138 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8139 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8140 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8141 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8144 \begin_layout Standard
8145 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8146 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8148 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8151 \begin_layout Subsection
8152 What You Can and Can't Nest
8155 \begin_layout Standard
8156 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8157 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8162 than a simple yes or no.
8163 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8166 \begin_layout Itemize
8167 Completely unnestable
8170 \begin_layout Itemize
8171 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8175 \begin_layout Itemize
8176 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8180 \begin_layout Standard
8181 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8182 environments have them:
8185 \begin_layout Description
8186 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8187 Can't nest into them.
8191 \begin_layout Itemize
8197 \begin_layout Itemize
8203 \begin_layout Itemize
8209 \begin_layout Itemize
8215 \begin_layout Itemize
8222 \begin_layout Description
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8227 Nestable You can nest them.
8228 You can nest other things into them.
8232 \begin_layout Itemize
8238 \begin_layout Itemize
8244 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 \begin_layout Description
8282 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8283 You can't nest anything into them.
8287 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 \begin_layout Itemize
8299 \begin_layout Itemize
8305 \begin_layout Itemize
8311 \begin_layout Itemize
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8335 \begin_layout Itemize
8341 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Itemize
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8369 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8391 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8401 \begin_inset space ~
8404 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8405 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8406 nested section headings violate this.
8414 \begin_layout Subsection
8415 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8416 \begin_inset Index idx
8419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8420 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8430 affected by nesting anyhow.
8434 \begin_layout Itemize
8438 \begin_layout Itemize
8442 \begin_layout Itemize
8446 \begin_layout Standard
8448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8456 Figures and tables in
8460 are not affected by this.
8465 Have a look at section
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8472 reference "sec:Floats"
8476 for more information about
8483 \begin_layout Standard
8484 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8485 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8489 \begin_layout Standard
8490 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8498 of its own, it behaves just like a
8499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8506 paragraph environment.
8507 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 Here's an example with a table:
8515 \begin_layout Enumerate
8520 \begin_layout Enumerate
8521 This is (a) and it's nested.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8532 \begin_layout Standard
8534 \begin_inset Tabular
8535 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8536 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8537 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8538 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8622 \begin_layout Standard
8623 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8630 \begin_layout Enumerate
8632 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8636 \begin_layout Enumerate
8640 \begin_layout Standard
8641 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8644 \begin_layout Enumerate
8649 \begin_layout Enumerate
8650 This is (a) and it's nested.
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8661 \begin_layout Standard
8663 \begin_inset Tabular
8664 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8665 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8667 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8751 \begin_layout Standard
8752 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8758 \begin_layout Enumerate
8765 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8768 \begin_layout Enumerate
8772 \begin_layout Standard
8773 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8780 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8783 \begin_layout Enumerate
8788 \begin_layout Enumerate
8789 This is (a) and it's nested.
8792 \begin_layout Standard
8793 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8799 \begin_layout Standard
8801 \begin_inset Tabular
8802 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8803 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8897 \begin_layout Enumerate
8899 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8906 \begin_layout Enumerate
8910 \begin_layout Standard
8911 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8917 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8918 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8922 \begin_layout Subsection
8923 Usage and General Features
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8936 is the innermost possible depth.
8937 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8940 \begin_layout Enumerate
8941 level #1 – outermost
8945 \begin_layout Enumerate
8950 \begin_layout Enumerate
8955 \begin_layout Enumerate
8960 \begin_layout Itemize
8965 \begin_layout Itemize
8974 \begin_layout Standard
8975 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8976 both of them in the example.
8977 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8987 For example, if we tried to nest another
8992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8999 , we would get errors.
9002 \begin_layout Subsection
9004 \begin_inset Index idx
9007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9016 \begin_layout Standard
9017 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9018 We have several examples of nested environments.
9019 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9024 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9027 \begin_layout Labeling
9028 \labelwidthstring MMM
9029 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9038 \begin_layout Labeling
9039 \labelwidthstring MMM
9040 #2-a This is level #2.
9041 We created it by using
9044 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9050 arg "depth-increment"
9057 \begin_layout Labeling
9058 \labelwidthstring MMM
9059 #3-a This is level #3.
9060 This time, we just enter
9067 arg "depth-increment"
9071 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9075 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9081 arg "depth-increment"
9088 \begin_layout Standard
9093 environment, nested inside of
9094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9102 So, it's at level #4.
9103 We did this by entering
9106 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9112 arg "depth-increment"
9115 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9120 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9136 \begin_layout Standard
9141 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9144 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9150 \begin_layout Labeling
9151 \labelwidthstring MMM
9152 #4-a This is level #4.
9156 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9159 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9164 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9168 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9173 keep nesting things inside
9174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9185 \begin_layout Labeling
9186 \labelwidthstring MMM
9187 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9192 \begin_layout Labeling
9193 \labelwidthstring MMM
9194 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9195 and this is level #6.
9196 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9200 \begin_layout Labeling
9201 \labelwidthstring MMM
9202 #5-b Back to level #5.
9206 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9212 arg "depth-decrement"
9219 \begin_layout Labeling
9220 \labelwidthstring MMM
9224 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9230 arg "depth-decrement"
9233 , we're back at level #4.
9237 \begin_layout Labeling
9238 \labelwidthstring MMM
9239 #3-b Back to level #3.
9240 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9244 \begin_layout Labeling
9245 \labelwidthstring MMM
9246 #2-b Back to level #2.
9251 \begin_layout Labeling
9252 \labelwidthstring MMM
9253 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9254 After this sentence, we will enter
9258 and change the paragraph environment back to
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 We could have also used the
9282 environment in place of the
9287 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9291 Example 2: Inheritance
9294 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9295 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9298 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9307 arg "depth-increment"
9311 \begin_inset Newline newline
9314 which, we will change to the
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 environment, at level #2.
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 Notice how the nested
9335 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9339 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9343 \begin_layout Standard
9344 We ended this example by entering
9349 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9353 and reset the nesting depth by using
9356 arg "depth-decrement"
9362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9363 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9372 \begin_inset Argument 1
9375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9376 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9385 This is level #1, in an
9389 paragraph environment.
9390 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9394 \begin_layout Enumerate
9399 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9405 arg "depth-increment"
9409 Now, what happens if we nest an
9413 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9414 label be? An asterisk?
9418 \begin_layout Itemize
9428 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9429 So, its label is a bullet.
9430 (We got here by using
9433 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9439 arg "depth-increment"
9442 , then changing the environment to
9450 \begin_layout Itemize
9451 Here's level #4, produced using
9454 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9460 arg "depth-increment"
9464 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9469 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9472 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9477 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9481 , because we are in the
9489 environment (that is, it is an
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9509 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9510 type of numbering does LyX use?
9513 \begin_layout Enumerate
9514 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9517 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9520 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9523 \begin_layout Enumerate
9527 arg "depth-decrement"
9530 to decrease the depth after the next
9533 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9540 \begin_layout Enumerate
9542 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9546 \begin_layout Enumerate
9548 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9549 numeral as the label.Why?
9552 \begin_layout Enumerate
9553 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9562 Notice, however, that LyX
9566 reset the counter for the label.
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9574 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9580 arg "depth-decrement"
9583 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9584 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9585 into the twofold-nested
9593 \begin_layout Enumerate
9594 The same thing happens if we do another
9597 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9603 arg "depth-decrement"
9606 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9609 \begin_layout Standard
9610 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9615 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9629 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9635 The same rule applies for the
9639 environment, as well.
9642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9643 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9646 \begin_layout Enumerate
9647 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9648 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9649 the same detail with how we did it.
9658 \begin_layout Standard
9666 arg "depth-increment"
9673 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9674 the example in parentheses someplace.
9675 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9676 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9677 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9681 \begin_layout Enumerate
9686 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9691 Now we will add verse.
9692 \begin_inset Newline newline
9695 It will get much worse.
9696 \begin_inset Newline newline
9706 arg "depth-increment"
9717 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9718 \begin_inset Newline newline
9721 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9722 \begin_inset Newline newline
9728 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9748 \begin_layout Standard
9750 \begin_inset Tabular
9751 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9752 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9753 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9754 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9843 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9853 arg "depth-increment"
9859 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9869 arg "depth-decrement"
9876 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 : level #1) This is another item.
9882 Note that selecting a
9886 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9887 3 times to put the table inside the
9895 \begin_layout Quotation
9896 We're now ending the
9900 list and changing to
9905 We're still at level #1.
9906 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9907 The next set of paragraphs is a
9908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9915 We will nest both the
9922 \begin_inset space ~
9927 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9931 for the letter body.
9935 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9938 to preserve the depth.
9939 Remember that you need to use
9942 arg "newline-insert newline"
9945 to create multiple lines inside the
9952 \begin_inset space ~
9962 \begin_layout Right Address
9964 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9968 \begin_inset Newline newline
9974 \begin_layout Address
9976 \begin_inset space ~
9982 \begin_layout Quotation
9983 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9987 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9988 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9989 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9990 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9991 as soon as possible.
9992 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9995 \begin_layout Quotation
9996 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9997 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9998 with your order, along with payment.
10001 \begin_layout Quotation
10002 We thank you again for your patience.
10005 \begin_layout Address
10007 \begin_inset Newline newline
10014 \begin_layout Quotation
10015 That ends that example!
10018 \begin_layout Standard
10019 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10020 just a few keystrokes.
10021 We could have easily nested an
10042 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10045 \begin_layout Section
10046 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10047 \begin_inset Index idx
10050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10059 \begin_layout Standard
10060 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10061 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10062 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10063 be broken at the end of a line.
10064 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10068 \begin_layout Subsection
10070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10072 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10077 \begin_inset Index idx
10080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10089 \begin_layout Standard
10090 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10091 line at that point.
10092 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10095 \begin_layout Quote
10096 Further documentation is given in section
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10103 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10111 \begin_layout Standard
10112 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10127 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10136 A protected space is set with
10138 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10139 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10141 \begin_inset space ~
10149 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
10155 \begin_layout Subsection
10157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10159 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10164 \begin_inset Index idx
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10168 Spacing ! Horizontal
10176 \begin_layout Standard
10177 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10179 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10180 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10184 The length units are listed in Appendix
10185 \begin_inset space ~
10189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10191 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10202 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10207 \begin_inset Index idx
10210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10211 Spaces ! Inter-word
10219 \begin_layout Standard
10220 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10221 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10222 at the ends of sentences.
10223 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10224 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10225 followed by a period; see section
10226 \begin_inset space ~
10230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10232 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10237 To insert a normal space, select
10239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10240 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10242 \begin_inset space ~
10250 arg "space-insert normal"
10256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10260 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10265 \begin_inset Index idx
10268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10277 \begin_layout Standard
10279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10286 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10295 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10296 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10297 inside abbreviations:
10300 \begin_layout Quote
10302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10306 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10309 \begin_layout Standard
10310 or between values and units.
10311 Compare for example this:
10312 \begin_inset Newline newline
10316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10320 \begin_inset Newline newline
10323 10 kg (normal space
10326 \begin_layout Standard
10327 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10329 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10330 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10332 \begin_inset space ~
10340 arg "space-insert thin"
10346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10350 \begin_layout Standard
10351 You can also insert the following space types:
10354 \begin_layout Description
10356 \begin_inset space ~
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10363 space A line with a
10364 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10368 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10372 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10375 negative thin space between the arrows.
10378 \begin_layout Description
10380 \begin_inset space ~
10384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10388 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10392 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10396 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10400 \begin_inset space ~
10404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10407 em) space between the arrows.
10410 \begin_layout Description
10412 \begin_inset space ~
10416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10420 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10424 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10428 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10432 \begin_inset space ~
10436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10439 em) space between the arrows.
10442 \begin_layout Description
10444 \begin_inset space ~
10448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10452 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10456 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10460 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10464 \begin_inset space ~
10468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10471 em) space between the arrows.
10474 \begin_layout Description
10476 \begin_inset space ~
10480 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10484 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10489 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10496 cm space between the arrows.
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset space ~
10505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10507 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10511 lists the different space sizes.
10514 \begin_layout Standard
10515 \begin_inset Float table
10520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10522 \begin_inset Caption
10524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10527 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10531 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10541 \begin_inset Tabular
10542 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10543 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10545 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10768 \begin_inset Index idx
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10780 \begin_layout Standard
10781 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10782 in a uniform fashion.
10783 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10784 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10785 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10786 equally between themselves.
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10793 \begin_layout Quote
10795 This is on the left side
10796 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10799 This is on the right
10802 \begin_layout Quote
10805 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10809 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10818 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10822 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10826 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10832 \begin_layout Standard
10833 That was an example in the
10839 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10843 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10847 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10850 is one in a standard paragraph.
10851 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10855 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10858 \begin_layout Standard
10859 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10867 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10870 \begin_layout Standard
10872 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10876 \begin_inset space ~
10882 \begin_layout Standard
10884 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10894 \begin_layout Standard
10896 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10900 \begin_inset space ~
10906 \begin_layout Standard
10908 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10918 \begin_layout Standard
10920 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10924 \begin_inset space ~
10930 \begin_layout Standard
10932 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10942 \begin_layout Standard
10943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10951 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10955 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10956 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10957 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10961 option in the space dialog.
10969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10973 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10978 \begin_inset Index idx
10981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10991 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10992 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10995 \begin_layout Standard
10996 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10999 What is correct English?:
11000 \begin_inset Newline newline
11004 \begin_inset Newline newline
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11011 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11012 \begin_inset Newline newline
11016 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11027 \begin_inset Newline newline
11031 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11042 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11048 \begin_layout Standard
11050 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11067 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11069 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11070 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11074 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset space ~
11088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11091 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11100 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11101 That is why it is named
11102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11110 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11111 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11115 \begin_layout Subsection
11117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11119 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11124 \begin_inset Index idx
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 \begin_layout Standard
11137 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11139 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11140 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11142 \begin_inset space ~
11148 There you find the following sizes:
11151 \begin_layout Standard
11164 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11169 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11171 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11172 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11174 \begin_inset space ~
11180 \begin_inset Index idx
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 Document ! Settings
11189 for the paragraph separation.
11190 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11201 \begin_layout Standard
11207 \begin_inset Index idx
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11216 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11217 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11222 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11223 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11232 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 s are described in section
11242 \begin_inset space ~
11246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11248 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11257 If there are several
11261 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11262 You can therefore use
11266 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11269 \begin_layout Standard
11274 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11275 \begin_inset space ~
11279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11281 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11288 \begin_layout Standard
11289 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11300 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11312 \begin_layout Subsection
11313 Paragraph Alignment
11314 \begin_inset Index idx
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 Paragraph ! Alignment
11326 \begin_layout Standard
11327 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11329 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11332 dialog (toolbar button
11335 arg "layout-paragraph"
11339 There are five possibilities:
11342 \begin_layout Itemize
11350 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11356 \begin_layout Itemize
11364 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11370 \begin_layout Itemize
11378 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11384 \begin_layout Itemize
11392 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11398 \begin_layout Itemize
11406 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11414 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11415 the left and right margins.
11416 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11421 This paragraph is right aligned,
11424 \begin_layout Standard
11426 this one is centered,
11429 \begin_layout Standard
11431 this one is left aligned.
11434 \begin_layout Subsection
11436 \begin_inset Index idx
11439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 Page breaks ! Forced
11446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11448 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11455 \begin_layout Standard
11456 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11457 can force a page break where you want one.
11458 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11459 Only if you use a lot of
11463 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11466 \begin_layout Standard
11467 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11468 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11472 have to change the page breaking.
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11476 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11478 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11480 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11481 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11483 \begin_inset space ~
11489 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11491 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11492 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11499 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11501 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11502 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11505 \begin_layout Standard
11506 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11507 at the top of a page.
11508 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11509 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11510 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11511 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11515 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11519 to learn more about
11526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11530 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11535 \begin_inset Index idx
11538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11539 Page breaks ! Clear
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11549 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11550 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11551 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11552 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11558 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11559 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11561 \begin_inset space ~
11567 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11569 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11570 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11572 \begin_inset space ~
11576 \begin_inset space ~
11581 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11582 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11585 \begin_layout Subsection
11587 \begin_inset Index idx
11590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11599 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11609 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11612 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11618 \begin_inset space ~
11626 arg "newline-insert newline"
11630 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11632 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11633 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11635 \begin_inset space ~
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11647 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11650 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11652 This is useful to avoid
11653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11660 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11663 \begin_layout Standard
11664 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11665 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11666 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11667 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11674 reference "sec:Quote"
11679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11681 reference "sec:Verse"
11686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11688 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11695 \begin_layout Subsection
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11699 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11704 \begin_inset Index idx
11707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11718 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11729 \begin_layout Standard
11733 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11734 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11736 \begin_inset space ~
11741 you can insert horizontal lines.
11742 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11743 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11744 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11747 \begin_layout Standard
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11760 \begin_layout Section
11761 Characters and Symbols
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11766 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11767 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11775 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11779 for information on how this is done.
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11788 dialog via the menu
11790 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11791 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11797 \begin_layout Standard
11798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11807 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11808 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11816 \begin_layout Section
11817 Fonts and Text Styles
11818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11820 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11827 \begin_layout Subsection
11829 \begin_inset Index idx
11832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11842 There are two types of fonts:
11845 \begin_layout Description
11847 \begin_inset space ~
11851 \begin_inset Index idx
11854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11860 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11865 characters) in the font.
11866 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11867 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11868 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11869 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11870 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11871 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11872 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11873 \begin_inset Newline newline
11876 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11877 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11878 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11879 sizes than at small ones.
11880 \begin_inset Newline newline
11894 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_layout Description
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset Index idx
11911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11917 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11918 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11919 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11920 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11921 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11922 image manipulation program.
11923 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11924 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11925 \begin_inset space ~
11928 pixels high up to 34
11929 \begin_inset space ~
11932 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11933 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11934 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11936 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11937 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11938 \begin_inset Newline newline
11941 Bitmap fonts are named
11944 \begin_inset space ~
11949 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11952 \begin_layout Standard
11953 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11954 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11955 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11956 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11957 use scalable fonts.
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11964 \begin_layout Standard
11965 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11966 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11967 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11968 font to emphasize text, you use an
11969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11977 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11978 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11982 \begin_layout Subsection
11984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11986 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11993 \begin_layout Standard
11994 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11995 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11996 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11998 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11999 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12000 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12001 to a word processor.
12002 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12003 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12004 across different machines.
12005 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12006 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12008 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12010 \begin_inset space ~
12014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12016 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12021 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
12022 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12027 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12028 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12030 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12031 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12032 that is installed on your system.
12033 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12037 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12045 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12046 es; so you might have to experiment.
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12063 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12064 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12072 \begin_layout Subsection
12073 Document Font and Font size
12074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12076 name "sub:Document-Font"
12081 \begin_inset Index idx
12084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12091 \begin_inset Index idx
12094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 You can set the document fonts in the
12106 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12110 \begin_inset Index idx
12113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12114 Document ! Settings
12124 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12125 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12128 \begin_inset space ~
12137 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12138 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
12139 with the roman font.
12142 \begin_layout Standard
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12159 This requires that you use
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12204 as the output format, i.
12205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12209 \begin_inset space \space{}
12212 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12219 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12224 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12225 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12230 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12231 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12232 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12234 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12237 \begin_layout Standard
12238 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12243 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12248 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12249 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12275 European Computer Modern
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12288 \begin_layout Standard
12297 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12298 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12303 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12306 \begin_inset space ~
12311 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12317 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12318 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12321 \begin_layout Itemize
12325 \begin_inset space ~
12330 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12343 \begin_inset space ~
12348 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12352 as the default font.
12353 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12354 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12371 One difference is improved kerning.
12379 \begin_layout Itemize
12383 \begin_inset space ~
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12392 fonts in (the rare) case that
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12400 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12415 Virtual means that it
12416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12427 -glyphs from other fonts.
12428 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12450 Loading the LaTeX-package
12455 \begin_inset Index idx
12458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12459 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12464 with the document preamble line
12465 \begin_inset Newline newline
12472 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12473 \begin_inset Newline newline
12478 will fix the guillemet problem.
12483 and that accented characters are not
12487 glyph, but built of
12491 characters, the accent and the letter.
12492 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12498 If you search for example for the French word
12499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12506 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12515 and not for the glyph
12516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12520 \begin_inset space ~
12524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12530 \begin_layout Itemize
12531 If you do not like the look of
12539 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12560 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 serif and typewriter fonts,
12568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12569 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12585 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12590 \begin_inset space \space{}
12598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12602 \begin_inset space \space{}
12608 \begin_inset space ~
12616 \begin_inset space ~
12626 but you can also select your own.
12627 \begin_inset Newline newline
12630 The differences between roman,
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12642 fonts are explained in section
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12654 \begin_inset Newline newline
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12665 was originally designed for newspapers.
12666 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12667 into the small newspaper columns.
12671 \begin_inset space ~
12676 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12679 \begin_layout Standard
12680 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12693 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12698 depends on the class you are using.
12699 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12702 \begin_layout Standard
12703 Note that the font size is the
12708 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12709 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12710 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12719 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12720 \begin_inset space ~
12724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12726 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12733 \begin_layout Standard
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12742 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12744 \begin_inset space ~
12747 serif or typewriter.
12752 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12762 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12765 \begin_layout Standard
12774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12783 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12789 \begin_inset Index idx
12792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12793 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12805 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12810 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12811 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12818 \begin_layout Standard
12819 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12821 Use Old Style Figures
12825 Use True Small Caps
12828 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12831 Use Old Style Figures
12833 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12835 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12843 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12847 Use True Small Caps
12849 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12850 of scaled capitals.
12851 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12852 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12855 \begin_layout Standard
12860 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12861 a font to display the script characters.
12865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12866 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12871 \begin_inset Index idx
12874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12875 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12880 So this has no effect for the document language
12894 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12898 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12906 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12910 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12911 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12912 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12914 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12917 dialog, see section
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12924 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12936 \begin_layout Subsection
12937 Using Different Character Styles
12938 \begin_inset Index idx
12941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12948 \begin_inset Index idx
12951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12960 \begin_layout Standard
12961 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12962 certain paragraph environments.
12963 LyX supports two character styles,
12972 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12976 \begin_layout Standard
12981 style, do one of the following:
12984 \begin_layout Itemize
12985 click on the toolbar button
12994 \begin_layout Itemize
12995 use the key binding
13004 \begin_layout Standard
13005 These commands are all toggles.
13010 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13013 \begin_layout Standard
13014 One typically uses the
13018 style for proper names.
13020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13027 is the original author of LyX.
13028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 A more widely used character style is the
13040 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13047 \begin_layout Itemize
13048 clicking on the toolbar button
13057 \begin_layout Itemize
13058 using the keybindings
13067 \begin_layout Standard
13072 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13073 es use a different font.
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13077 We've been using the
13081 style all over the place in this document.
13082 Here's one more example:
13085 \begin_layout Quotation
13088 Do not overuse character styles!
13091 \begin_layout Standard
13092 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13093 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13094 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13095 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13100 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13108 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13113 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13119 arg "dialog-show character"
13125 \begin_layout Subsection
13126 Fine-Tuning with the
13131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13133 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13138 \begin_inset Index idx
13141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13150 \begin_layout Standard
13151 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13152 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13153 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13154 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13155 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13156 from ordinary dialog.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13161 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13162 \begin_inset Newline newline
13165 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13166 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13169 \begin_layout Standard
13170 To use custom character styles, open the
13172 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13177 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13180 dialog or press the toolbar button
13183 arg "dialog-show character"
13187 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13188 font property that you can choose.
13189 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13192 \begin_inset space ~
13197 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13202 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13203 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13204 environments all at once.
13207 \begin_layout Standard
13208 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13223 \begin_layout Labeling
13224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13238 The possible options are:
13242 \begin_layout Labeling
13243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13248 This is the Roman font family.
13249 Normally a serif font.
13250 It's also the default family.
13260 \begin_layout Labeling
13261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13272 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13284 \begin_layout Labeling
13285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13292 This is the Typewriter font family.
13298 arg "font-typewriter"
13307 \begin_layout Labeling
13308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13313 This corresponds to the print weight.
13318 \begin_layout Labeling
13319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13324 This is the Medium font series.
13325 It's also the default series.
13328 \begin_layout Labeling
13329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13336 This is the Bold font series.
13349 \begin_layout Labeling
13350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13355 As the name implies.
13360 \begin_layout Labeling
13361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13366 This is the Upright font shape.
13367 It's also the default shape.
13370 \begin_layout Labeling
13371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13385 s the Italic font shape
13391 \begin_layout Labeling
13392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13399 This is the Slanted font shape
13401 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13404 \begin_layout Labeling
13405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13409 \begin_inset space ~
13416 This is the Small caps font shape
13423 \begin_layout Labeling
13424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13429 Alters the text color.
13430 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13439 , which means that the document default color set in
13441 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13442 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13453 is used, you can choose between
13486 \begin_inset Index idx
13489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13504 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13505 the language of the document.
13506 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13508 \begin_inset Newline newline
13511 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13512 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13513 When using the spell checking (see section
13514 \begin_inset space ~
13518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13520 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13524 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13533 Alters the size of the font.
13534 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13535 proportional to the document font size.
13536 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13537 what you want to do.
13542 \begin_layout Labeling
13543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13564 arg "font-size tiny"
13570 \begin_layout Labeling
13571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13592 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13598 \begin_layout Labeling
13599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13620 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13626 \begin_layout Labeling
13627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13648 arg "font-size small"
13654 \begin_layout Labeling
13655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13669 It's also the default size.
13673 arg "font-size normal"
13679 \begin_layout Labeling
13680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13701 arg "font-size large"
13707 \begin_layout Labeling
13708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13729 arg "font-size larger"
13735 \begin_layout Labeling
13736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13757 arg "font-size largest"
13763 \begin_layout Labeling
13764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13785 arg "font-size huge"
13791 \begin_layout Labeling
13792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13813 arg "font-size giant"
13819 \begin_layout Labeling
13820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13825 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13845 arg "font-size increase"
13851 \begin_layout Labeling
13852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13857 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13877 arg "font-size decrease"
13884 \begin_layout Standard
13889 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13890 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13891 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13892 — use those instead.
13893 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13896 \begin_layout Labeling
13897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13902 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13907 \begin_layout Labeling
13908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13915 This is text with emphasize on
13918 This might seem like the same as
13922 , but it is actually a bit different.
13928 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13930 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13933 \begin_layout Labeling
13934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13941 This is text with Underbar on.
13947 arg "font-underline"
13953 \begin_inset Newline newline
13958 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13959 when you could not change fonts.
13960 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13961 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13965 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13968 \begin_layout Labeling
13969 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13973 \begin_inset space ~
13980 This is text with Double underbar on.
13986 arg "font-underunderline"
13990 \begin_inset Newline newline
13993 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13994 about double underbar.
13997 \begin_layout Labeling
13998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14002 \begin_inset space ~
14009 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14015 arg "font-underwave"
14019 \begin_inset Newline newline
14022 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14023 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This is text with Strikeout on.
14040 arg "font-strikeout"
14044 \begin_inset Newline newline
14047 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14048 changed in the meantime.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is text with Noun on.
14066 , this is a logical attribute.
14067 Normally it's equivalent to
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14079 \begin_layout Standard
14080 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14081 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14083 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14085 \begin_inset space ~
14088 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14094 arg "dialog-show character"
14097 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14098 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14101 arg "textstyle-apply"
14105 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14110 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14117 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14118 (suppose you just set the shape to
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14137 \begin_inset space ~
14149 \begin_layout Standard
14150 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14170 \begin_layout Itemize
14176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14183 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14201 \begin_inset Newline newline
14205 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14219 \begin_inset Note Note
14222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14223 For more on phantoms see section
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14230 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14240 \begin_inset Newline newline
14246 \begin_layout Itemize
14251 fonts use characters with serifs.
14252 These are the small
14253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14260 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14261 The following example shows the difference:
14262 \begin_inset Newline newline
14266 \begin_inset Newline newline
14271 text without serifs
14274 \begin_inset Newline newline
14277 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14278 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14285 \begin_layout Itemize
14290 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14291 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14292 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14295 \begin_layout Standard
14296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14304 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14307 \begin_inset space ~
14312 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14313 the property to be removed.
14314 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14315 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14316 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14334 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14335 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14343 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14347 \begin_inset space ~
14352 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 If you, for example, set
14364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14382 \begin_inset space ~
14387 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14396 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14399 \begin_layout Standard
14400 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14401 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14404 \begin_layout Section
14405 Printing and Previewing
14408 \begin_layout Subsection
14412 \begin_layout Standard
14413 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14414 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14415 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14416 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14417 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14419 Additional Features
14424 \begin_layout Standard
14425 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14426 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14427 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14428 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14429 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14430 This happens in two stages:
14433 \begin_layout Enumerate
14434 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14435 generating a file with the extension,
14436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 \begin_layout Enumerate
14451 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14455 file to produce printable output.
14458 \begin_layout Subsection
14459 Output file formats
14460 \begin_inset Index idx
14463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14472 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14480 Simple text (ASCII)
14481 \begin_inset Index idx
14484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 File formats ! ASCII
14493 \begin_layout Standard
14494 This file type has the extension
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14507 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14518 \begin_layout Standard
14519 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14521 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14522 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14524 \begin_inset space ~
14530 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14531 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14532 \begin_inset space ~
14536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14538 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14543 If your document includes such material, use
14545 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14546 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14548 \begin_inset space ~
14552 \begin_inset space ~
14556 \begin_inset space ~
14564 \begin_inset space ~
14568 \begin_inset space ~
14574 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14575 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14580 \begin_inset Index idx
14583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14584 File formats ! LaTeX
14592 \begin_layout Standard
14593 This file type has the extension
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14607 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14608 it manually with console commands.
14609 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14610 you view or export your document.
14613 \begin_layout Standard
14614 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14616 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14617 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14632 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14633 \begin_inset space ~
14637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14639 reference "sub:Export"
14646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14648 \begin_inset Index idx
14651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14660 \begin_layout Standard
14661 This file type has the extension
14662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14682 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14683 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14684 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14688 \begin_layout Standard
14689 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14690 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14691 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14692 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14693 when you view the DVI.
14694 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14697 \begin_layout Standard
14698 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14700 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14701 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14706 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14707 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14726 The latter option uses the program
14735 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14736 font access (see section
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14743 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14748 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14749 standard TeX processor.
14752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14754 \begin_inset Index idx
14757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14758 File formats ! PostScript
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14767 This file type has the extension
14768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 PostScript was developed by the company
14784 as a printer language.
14785 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14787 PostScript can be seen as a
14788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14791 programming language
14792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14795 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14800 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14806 \begin_inset Index idx
14809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14810 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14820 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14823 \begin_layout Standard
14824 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14828 Encapsulated PostScript
14829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14832 (EPS, file extension
14833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14845 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14846 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14847 If, for example, you have 50
14848 \begin_inset space ~
14851 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14852 \begin_inset space ~
14855 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14856 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14857 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14858 EPS to avoid this problem.
14861 \begin_layout Standard
14862 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14864 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14865 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14873 \begin_inset Index idx
14876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14883 \begin_inset Index idx
14886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14895 \begin_layout Standard
14896 This file type has the extension
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14913 Portable Document Format
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14921 was derived from PostScript.
14922 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14931 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14932 looks exactly the same.
14935 \begin_layout Standard
14936 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14940 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14944 (JPG, file extension
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14972 Portable Network Graphics
14973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14976 (PNG, file extension
14977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14990 background to one of these formats.
14991 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14992 will slow down your workflow.
14993 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14996 \begin_layout Standard
14997 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14999 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15005 \begin_layout Description
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15010 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15014 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15017 \begin_layout Description
15019 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15033 X) This uses the program
15037 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15042 is a new engine, derived from
15046 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15047 access (see section
15048 \begin_inset space ~
15052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15054 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15059 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15060 standard TeX processor.
15063 \begin_layout Description
15065 \begin_inset space ~
15072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15079 X) This uses the program
15083 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15088 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15089 font access (see section
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15096 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15101 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15102 vertically written Japanese.
15105 \begin_layout Description
15107 \begin_inset space ~
15110 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15114 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15118 \begin_layout Description
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15123 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15127 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15128 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15132 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15133 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15136 \begin_layout Standard
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15149 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15150 works without problems.
15151 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15152 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15175 \begin_inset space ~
15182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15191 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15201 \begin_inset Index idx
15204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15205 FileFormats ! XHTML
15211 \begin_inset Index idx
15214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15223 \begin_layout Standard
15224 This file type has the extension
15225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15237 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15238 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15239 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15240 suitable for the purpose.
15241 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15243 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15244 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15247 between different formats, which are described in section
15249 Math Output in XHTML
15254 \begin_inset space ~
15262 \begin_layout Standard
15263 XHTML output remains
15264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15271 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15274 LyX and the World Wide Web
15278 Additional Features
15280 manual, for more information.
15283 \begin_layout Standard
15284 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15286 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15287 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15293 \begin_layout Subsection
15295 \begin_inset Index idx
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15308 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15309 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15318 or use the toolbar button
15325 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15326 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15333 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15337 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15345 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15350 Further output formats can be selected via
15352 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15353 View (Other Formats)
15355 or the toolbar button
15356 \begin_inset Graphics
15357 filename ../images/view-others.png
15359 groupId toolbarbuttons
15366 \begin_layout Standard
15367 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15368 viewer window using the menu
15370 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15375 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15376 Update (Other Formats)
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15384 To have a real output, export your document.
15387 \begin_layout Subsection
15388 Printing the File from within LyX
15389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15391 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15398 \begin_layout Standard
15399 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15400 it directly from within LyX.
15401 To print a file, select the menu
15403 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15409 arg "dialog-show print"
15412 ) or click on the toolbar button
15415 arg "dialog-show print"
15419 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15420 This file is then processed by the program
15424 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15429 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15432 \begin_layout Standard
15433 You can set the following print parameters in the
15436 \begin_inset space ~
15444 \begin_layout Labeling
15445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15450 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 Note that this printer name is for the program
15464 has to be configured for this printer name.
15465 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15466 \begin_inset space ~
15470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15472 reference "sub:Printer"
15481 The printer should understand PostScript.
15484 \begin_layout Labeling
15485 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15490 The name of a file to print to.
15491 The output will be a PostScript file.
15492 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15496 \begin_layout Standard
15497 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15498 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15499 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15500 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15501 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15502 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15503 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15506 \begin_layout Section
15507 A few Words about Typography
15508 \begin_inset Index idx
15511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15520 \begin_layout Subsection
15521 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15557 character comes in four lengths: the
15569 , and the minus sign:
15570 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15576 \begin_layout Standard
15577 \begin_inset Tabular
15578 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15579 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15580 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15581 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15583 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15612 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15677 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15679 \begin_inset space ~
15682 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15689 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15714 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15716 \begin_inset space ~
15719 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15740 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15774 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15793 character multiple times in a row.
15794 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15795 the final output, but not in LyX.
15797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15827 \begin_layout Standard
15828 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15829 math mode and has a length of its own.
15830 Here are some examples:
15833 \begin_layout Enumerate
15834 line- and page-breaks
15835 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15845 \begin_layout Enumerate
15847 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15857 \begin_layout Enumerate
15858 Oh — there's a dash.
15859 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15869 \begin_layout Enumerate
15870 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15874 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15884 \begin_layout Subsection
15886 \begin_inset Index idx
15889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15898 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15905 \begin_layout Standard
15906 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15907 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15912 \begin_inset Index idx
15915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15916 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15921 following the rules of the document language.
15924 \begin_layout Standard
15925 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15930 font and with unusual constructs, like
15931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15939 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15941 This is done with the menu
15943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15944 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15946 \begin_inset space ~
15952 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15953 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15956 \begin_layout Standard
15957 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15958 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15968 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15976 as a hyphenation possibility.
15977 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15978 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15979 as described in section
15980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15983 Prevent Hyphenation
15984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15990 \begin_inset space ~
15998 \begin_layout Subsection
16000 \begin_inset Index idx
16003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16013 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16016 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16025 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16026 LaTeX then adds the
16027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16030 appropriate amount of space.
16031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16036 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16037 gets after another word.
16040 \begin_layout Standard
16041 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16042 not work in all cases.
16044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16056 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 Here are some examples of
16064 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16067 \begin_layout Itemize
16072 \begin_layout Itemize
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16081 \begin_layout Itemize
16083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16087 this is too much space!
16090 \begin_layout Itemize
16095 \begin_layout Standard
16096 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16099 \begin_layout Standard
16100 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16103 \begin_layout Enumerate
16107 \begin_inset space ~
16112 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16124 \begin_inset Index idx
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 Spaces ! inter-word
16136 \begin_layout Enumerate
16140 \begin_inset space ~
16145 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16146 \begin_inset space ~
16150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16152 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16157 \begin_inset Index idx
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 \begin_layout Enumerate
16173 \begin_inset space ~
16177 \begin_inset space ~
16181 \begin_inset space ~
16188 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16190 \begin_inset space ~
16195 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16196 This function is also bound to
16199 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16205 \begin_layout Standard
16206 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16209 \begin_layout Itemize
16211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16215 \begin_inset space \space{}
16218 this is too much space!
16221 \begin_layout Itemize
16222 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16226 \begin_layout Standard
16227 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16228 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16229 will take care of this.
16232 \begin_layout Standard
16233 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16242 feature described in the section
16248 Additional Features
16253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16255 \begin_inset Index idx
16258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 Typography ! Quotes
16265 \begin_inset Index idx
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16299 \begin_layout Standard
16300 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16301 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16302 and use a closing quote at the end.
16304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16312 The keyboard character,
16316 , generates this automatically.
16319 \begin_layout Standard
16320 You can specify what character the
16324 key produces using the submenu
16330 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16334 \begin_inset Index idx
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 Document ! Settings
16348 There are six choices:
16351 \begin_layout Labeling
16352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 \begin_layout Labeling
16376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16379 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16383 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16389 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16393 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16399 \begin_layout Labeling
16400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16403 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16407 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16413 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16423 \begin_layout Labeling
16424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16427 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16431 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16437 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16447 \begin_layout Labeling
16448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16451 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16461 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16465 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16471 \begin_layout Labeling
16472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16475 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16479 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16485 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16489 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16499 arg "quote-insert single"
16505 \begin_layout Subsection
16507 \begin_inset Index idx
16510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16511 Typography ! Ligatures
16517 \begin_inset Index idx
16520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16551 name "sub:Ligatures"
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16559 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16560 print them as single characters.
16561 These groups are known as
16566 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16568 Here are the standard ligatures:
16571 \begin_layout Itemize
16575 \begin_layout Itemize
16579 \begin_layout Itemize
16583 \begin_layout Itemize
16587 \begin_layout Itemize
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16592 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16596 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16597 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16605 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16621 To break a ligature, use
16623 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16624 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16626 \begin_inset space ~
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16661 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16669 \begin_layout Subsection
16671 \begin_inset Index idx
16674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16683 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16690 \begin_layout Standard
16691 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16692 characters in different sizes and positions.
16693 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16694 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16714 \begin_inset Note Note
16717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16718 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
16719 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16724 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16725 following proper names:
16728 \begin_layout Description
16729 LyX The name of the game, write
16730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16751 \begin_layout Description
16752 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16774 \begin_layout Description
16775 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16797 \begin_layout Description
16798 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16820 \begin_layout Standard
16821 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16826 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16834 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16835 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16836 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16839 : The actual version is
16840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16847 , the previous one was
16848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16858 \begin_layout Standard
16859 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16860 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16861 In LyX this will look like
16862 \begin_inset Graphics
16863 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16869 \begin_inset Newline newline
16872 For more about TeX Code, see section
16873 \begin_inset space ~
16877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16879 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16886 \begin_layout Subsection
16888 \begin_inset Index idx
16891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16902 space between two words.
16903 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16913 for units use the menu
16915 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16916 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16918 \begin_inset space ~
16926 arg "space-insert thin"
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16933 Here is an example to show the differences:
16936 \begin_layout Standard
16937 \begin_inset Tabular
16938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16939 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16940 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16941 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_inset space ~
16952 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16964 space between number and unit
16971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16980 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16992 half space between number and unit
17005 \begin_layout Subsection
17007 \begin_inset Index idx
17010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17011 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17019 \begin_layout Standard
17020 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17022 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17023 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17024 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17025 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17026 These bits of text became known as
17037 \begin_layout Standard
17038 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17039 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17040 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17041 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17042 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17043 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17044 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17045 \begin_inset Newline newline
17053 \begin_inset Newline newline
17061 \begin_inset Newline newline
17064 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17065 Some LaTeX books (such as
17066 \begin_inset space ~
17070 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17072 key "latexcompanion"
17077 \begin_inset space ~
17081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17087 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17091 \begin_layout Chapter
17092 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17095 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17106 \begin_inset space ~
17112 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17115 \begin_layout Section
17117 \begin_inset Index idx
17120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17136 \begin_layout Standard
17137 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17140 \begin_layout Description
17142 \begin_inset space ~
17145 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17146 \begin_inset Newline newline
17150 \begin_inset Note Note
17153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17154 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17162 \begin_layout Description
17163 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17164 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17166 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17167 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17180 \begin_inset space ~
17186 \begin_inset Newline newline
17190 \begin_inset Note Comment
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17194 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17202 \begin_layout Description
17204 \begin_inset space ~
17207 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17208 set in the document settings under
17210 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17212 \begin_inset space ~
17218 \begin_inset Newline newline
17222 \begin_inset Newline newline
17226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17235 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17236 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17241 of a comment that appears in the output.
17247 \begin_inset Newline newline
17251 \begin_inset Newline newline
17254 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17258 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17266 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17270 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17273 \begin_layout Section
17275 \begin_inset Index idx
17278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17287 name "sec:Footnotes"
17294 \begin_layout Standard
17295 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17298 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17301 or the toolbar button
17304 arg "footnote-insert"
17316 \begin_inset Graphics
17317 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17326 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17355 label, the box will
17359 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17360 Clicking on the box label again will close
17373 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17374 and click on the footnote
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17390 Here is an example footnote:
17398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17399 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17407 \begin_layout Standard
17408 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17409 position where the footnote box is placed.
17410 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17411 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17412 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17413 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17418 ey are described in the
17421 \begin_inset space ~
17429 \begin_layout Section
17431 \begin_inset Index idx
17434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17443 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17450 \begin_layout Standard
17451 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17452 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17454 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17461 or the toolbar button
17464 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17490 appearing within your text.
17491 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17500 \begin_layout Standard
17501 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17505 \begin_inset Marginal
17508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 This is a marginal note.
17518 \begin_layout Standard
17519 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17520 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17521 pages, right on odd pages.
17524 \begin_layout Standard
17525 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17536 \begin_inset space ~
17544 \begin_layout Section
17545 Graphics and Images
17546 \begin_inset Index idx
17549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 \begin_inset Index idx
17559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17568 name "sec:Graphics"
17575 \begin_layout Standard
17576 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17577 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17580 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17585 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17589 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17592 \begin_layout Standard
17593 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17598 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17599 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17601 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17602 \begin_inset space ~
17606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17608 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17615 \begin_layout Standard
17620 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17621 of the image in the output.
17622 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17626 \begin_inset space ~
17630 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset space ~
17643 \begin_inset space ~
17647 \begin_inset space ~
17652 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17653 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17661 \begin_layout Standard
17668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17676 \begin_inset space ~
17680 \begin_inset space ~
17687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17696 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17697 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17701 \begin_inset space ~
17706 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17707 with the image size is printed.
17711 \begin_inset space ~
17715 \begin_inset space ~
17719 \begin_inset space ~
17724 is explained in the
17727 \begin_inset space ~
17739 \begin_layout Standard
17740 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17741 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17743 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17746 \begin_layout Standard
17748 \begin_inset Graphics
17749 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17757 \begin_layout Standard
17758 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17759 the image into a float, see section
17760 \begin_inset space ~
17764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17766 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17773 \begin_layout Subsection
17775 \begin_inset Index idx
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17787 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17794 \begin_layout Standard
17795 You can insert images in any known file format.
17796 But as we explained in section
17797 \begin_inset space ~
17801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17803 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17807 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17808 LyX therefore uses the program
17812 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17813 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17814 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17815 \begin_inset space ~
17819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17821 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17828 \begin_layout Standard
17829 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17832 \begin_layout Description
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17837 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17838 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17839 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17843 Graphics Interchange Format
17844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17847 (GIF, file extension
17848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17860 \begin_inset Index idx
17863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 Portable Network Graphics
17896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17899 (PNG, file extension
17900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17912 \begin_inset Index idx
17915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17947 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17951 (JPG, file extension
17952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17976 \begin_inset Index idx
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18010 \begin_layout Description
18012 \begin_inset space ~
18015 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18017 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18018 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18019 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18020 \begin_inset Newline newline
18023 Scalable image formats can be
18024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18027 Scalable Vector Graphics
18028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18031 (SVG, file extension
18032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18044 \begin_inset Index idx
18047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18079 Encapsulated PostScript
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 (EPS, file extension
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 \begin_inset Index idx
18099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18131 Portable Document Format
18132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18135 (PDF, file extension
18136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18148 \begin_inset Index idx
18151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18166 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18167 result will not be scalable.
18168 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18183 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18190 \begin_layout Subsection
18191 Grouping of Image Settings
18192 \begin_inset Index idx
18195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18196 Images ! Settings grouping
18204 \begin_layout Standard
18205 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18207 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18208 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18210 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18211 need to manually change each of them.
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18216 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18246 \begin_inset space ~
18250 \begin_inset space ~
18257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18267 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18268 and checking the name of the desired group.
18271 \begin_layout Section
18273 \begin_inset Index idx
18276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18292 \begin_layout Standard
18293 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18296 arg "tabular-insert"
18301 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18305 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18306 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18307 from the rest of the table.
18308 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18309 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18311 Here is an example table:
18314 \begin_layout Standard
18316 \begin_inset Tabular
18317 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18318 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18319 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18320 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18321 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18322 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 \begin_layout Subsection
18526 \begin_layout Standard
18527 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18530 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18534 This brings up the table dialog.
18535 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18536 cursor is placed currently.
18537 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18538 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18539 done on all of your selection.
18542 \begin_layout Standard
18543 In addition to the table dialog, the
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18551 helps you in setting table properties.
18552 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18555 \begin_layout Standard
18559 \begin_inset space ~
18564 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18565 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18566 current cell respectively.
18567 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18569 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18570 of text, see section
18571 \begin_inset space ~
18575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18577 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18584 \begin_layout Standard
18585 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18586 using the check box
18595 This will merge the cells to
18599 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18600 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18601 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18602 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18603 in the last row without the upper border:
18606 \begin_layout Standard
18608 \begin_inset Tabular
18609 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18610 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18611 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18612 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18613 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18614 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18625 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18710 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18745 \begin_layout Standard
18746 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18747 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18748 explained in the chapter
18755 \begin_inset space ~
18761 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18765 degrees counterclockwise.
18766 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18769 \begin_layout Standard
18770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18778 Most DVI-viewers are
18782 able to display rotations.
18790 \begin_layout Standard
18795 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18800 adds lines for all cell borders.
18803 \begin_layout Subsection
18805 \begin_inset Index idx
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 Tables ! Longtables
18815 \begin_inset Index idx
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 \begin_layout Standard
18828 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18831 \begin_inset space ~
18835 \begin_inset space ~
18844 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18845 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18848 \begin_layout Description
18853 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18854 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18855 except for the first page, if
18858 \begin_inset space ~
18866 \begin_layout Description
18870 \begin_inset space ~
18875 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18876 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18879 \begin_layout Description
18884 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18885 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18886 except for the last page, if
18889 \begin_inset space ~
18897 \begin_layout Description
18901 \begin_inset space ~
18906 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18907 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18910 \begin_layout Description
18911 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18912 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18914 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18918 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18929 \begin_layout Standard
18930 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18931 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18932 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18938 In this context, first means first in this order:
18941 \begin_inset space ~
18953 \begin_inset space ~
18958 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18961 \begin_layout Standard
18963 \begin_inset Tabular
18964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18965 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18966 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18967 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18968 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18969 <row endfirsthead="true">
18970 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18976 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18981 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18990 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <row endfirsthead="true">
19001 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19021 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 <row endhead="true">
19034 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19064 <row endhead="true">
19065 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19076 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19085 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19097 <row endfoot="true">
19098 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <row endlastfoot="true">
21080 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 \begin_layout Subsection
21119 \begin_inset Index idx
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21131 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21138 \begin_layout Standard
21139 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21140 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21141 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21142 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21146 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21149 \begin_layout Standard
21150 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21151 for the column in the table dialog.
21152 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21153 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21157 \begin_layout Standard
21159 \begin_inset Tabular
21160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21161 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21163 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 This is longer now.
21314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21366 This is longer now.
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 \begin_layout Standard
21398 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21399 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21405 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21411 Selection with the mouse or with
21415 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21416 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21417 the selection from outside the table.
21420 \begin_layout Section
21422 \begin_inset Index idx
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21441 \begin_layout Subsection
21445 \begin_layout Standard
21446 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21447 have a fixed location.
21449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21456 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21464 \begin_inset space ~
21469 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21470 too many notes on the current page.
21473 \begin_layout Standard
21474 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21475 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21476 and pages without text.
21477 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21478 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21479 Floats are therefore numbered.
21480 Referencing is described in section
21481 \begin_inset space ~
21485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21487 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21494 \begin_layout Standard
21495 To insert a float, use the menu
21497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21501 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21502 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21504 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21505 \begin_inset Index idx
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21515 paragraph within the float.
21516 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21517 by left-clicking on the box label.
21518 A closed float box looks like this:
21519 \begin_inset Graphics
21520 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21525 – a gray button with a red label.
21528 \begin_layout Standard
21529 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21530 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21533 \begin_layout Subsection
21537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21541 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21546 \begin_inset Index idx
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 Floats ! Figure floats
21558 \begin_layout Standard
21560 \begin_inset space ~
21564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21566 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21570 was created using the menu
21572 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21573 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21579 arg "float-insert figure"
21583 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21586 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21592 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21596 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21597 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21599 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21601 \begin_inset space ~
21609 arg "layout-paragraph"
21615 \begin_layout Standard
21616 \begin_inset Float figure
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 \begin_inset Graphics
21624 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21639 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21643 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21656 \begin_layout Standard
21657 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21658 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21660 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21669 ) and refer to it using the menu
21671 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21677 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21681 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21682 vague references like
21683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21690 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21700 For more about cross-references, see section
21701 \begin_inset space ~
21705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21707 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21714 \begin_layout Standard
21715 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21716 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21717 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21718 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21719 as described in section
21720 \begin_inset space ~
21724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21726 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21732 \begin_inset space ~
21736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21738 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21742 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21743 You can also set the images one below the other.
21745 \begin_inset space ~
21749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21751 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21758 reference "fig:Platypus"
21762 are the subfigures.
21765 \begin_layout Standard
21766 \begin_inset Float figure
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21776 \begin_inset Float figure
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21787 name "fig:Undefinable"
21799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 \begin_inset Graphics
21801 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21812 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21816 \begin_inset Float figure
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21827 name "fig:Platypus"
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 \begin_inset Graphics
21841 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21853 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21865 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21869 Two distorted images.
21882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21884 \begin_inset Index idx
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 Floats ! Table floats
21896 \begin_layout Standard
21897 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21899 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21900 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21903 or the toolbar button
21906 arg "float-insert table"
21910 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21911 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21912 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21914 \begin_inset space ~
21918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21920 reference "tab:Table-float"
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21928 \begin_inset Float table
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21939 name "tab:Table-float"
21951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 \begin_inset Tabular
21954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21955 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22109 \end{array}\right]$
22117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22151 \begin_layout Subsection
22153 \begin_inset Index idx
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 \begin_layout Standard
22166 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22167 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22168 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22170 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22178 \begin_inset space ~
22186 \begin_layout Section
22188 \begin_inset Index idx
22191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \begin_layout Standard
22201 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22203 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22204 \begin_inset space \space{}
22211 \begin_layout Standard
22212 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22214 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22218 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22219 and its alignment within the page.
22222 \begin_layout Standard
22224 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22234 height_special "totalheight"
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 This is a minipage.
22241 The text is set in an italic style.
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22248 another formatting.
22256 \begin_layout Standard
22257 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22260 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22264 as described in section
22265 \begin_inset space ~
22269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22271 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22276 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22282 \begin_layout Standard
22283 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22293 height_special "totalheight"
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22298 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22304 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22308 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22318 height_special "totalheight"
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22323 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22331 \begin_layout Standard
22332 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22338 \begin_layout Standard
22339 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22341 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22348 \begin_inset space ~
22356 \begin_layout Chapter
22357 Mathematical Formulas
22358 \begin_inset Index idx
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 \begin_inset Index idx
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22402 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22409 \begin_layout Standard
22410 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22415 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22418 \begin_layout Section
22420 \begin_inset Index idx
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 \begin_layout Standard
22433 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22446 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22448 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22449 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22450 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22452 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22458 \begin_layout Standard
22459 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22463 \begin_inset space ~
22468 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22471 \begin_layout Standard
22472 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22473 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22476 \begin_layout Standard
22477 This is a line with an inline formula
22478 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22484 \begin_layout Standard
22485 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22486 paragraph, like this one:
22487 \begin_inset Formula
22494 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22497 \begin_layout Standard
22498 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22499 For example, typing
22500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22513 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22514 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22518 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22521 \begin_inset space ~
22529 \begin_layout Subsection
22530 Navigating in Formulas
22531 \begin_inset Index idx
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 \begin_layout Standard
22544 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22545 achieved with the arrow keys.
22546 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22547 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22552 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22553 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22557 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22561 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22564 \end{array}\right]$
22572 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22577 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22578 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22581 \begin_layout Standard
22586 , printed in this document as
22587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22591 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22598 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22599 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22600 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22605 For example, if you want
22606 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22614 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22624 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22628 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22633 , since in the latter case only the
22636 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22641 will be under the square root sign:
22642 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22648 \begin_layout Standard
22649 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22651 \begin_inset Formula
22653 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22662 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22663 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22666 \begin_layout Subsection
22670 \begin_layout Standard
22671 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22672 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22676 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22677 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22678 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22679 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22680 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22683 \begin_layout Subsection
22684 Exponents and Subscripts
22685 \begin_inset Index idx
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 \begin_inset Index idx
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 \begin_layout Standard
22708 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22711 arg "math-superscript"
22717 arg "math-subscript"
22720 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22722 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22725 , type in a formula
22728 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22738 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22744 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22748 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22754 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22760 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22769 , you have to use an extra
22773 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22774 For example, if you want
22775 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22781 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22787 Subscripts are similar: To get
22788 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22794 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22802 \begin_layout Subsection
22804 \begin_inset Index idx
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 \begin_layout Standard
22817 Create a fraction either with the command
22823 or by using the icon
22826 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22832 \begin_inset space ~
22838 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22839 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22840 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22845 To move back up, press
22850 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22851 \begin_inset Formula
22853 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22856 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22864 \begin_layout Subsection
22866 \begin_inset Index idx
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 \begin_layout Standard
22879 Roots can be created using the
22882 \begin_inset space ~
22890 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22896 arg "math-insert \\root"
22918 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22924 always produces a square root.
22927 \begin_layout Subsection
22928 Operators with Limits
22929 \begin_inset Index idx
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 \begin_inset Index idx
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22951 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22958 \begin_layout Standard
22960 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22964 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22967 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22968 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22969 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22970 The sum operator will automatically place its
22971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22978 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22980 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22984 \begin_inset Formula
22986 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22991 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22995 \begin_layout Standard
22996 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22998 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22999 behind the operator and using the menu
23001 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23002 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23004 \begin_inset space ~
23008 \begin_inset space ~
23022 \begin_layout Standard
23023 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23032 \begin_inset Index idx
23035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 \begin_inset Formula
23044 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23049 which will place the
23050 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23062 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23063 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23069 \begin_layout Standard
23070 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23077 Have a look at section
23078 \begin_inset space ~
23082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23084 reference "sub:Functions"
23088 for an explanation of function macros.
23091 \begin_layout Subsection
23093 \begin_inset Index idx
23096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23105 \begin_layout Standard
23106 Most math symbols can be found in the
23109 \begin_inset space ~
23114 under one of several categories; including
23131 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23136 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23137 you don't have to use the
23140 \begin_inset space ~
23145 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23146 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23149 \begin_layout Subsection
23151 \begin_inset Index idx
23154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 \begin_layout Standard
23164 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23169 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23175 \begin_inset space ~
23185 arg "math-insert \\space"
23191 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23192 For example, the sequence
23197 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23201 \begin_inset Graphics
23202 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23207 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23208 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23209 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23210 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23212 Here are two examples:
23215 \begin_layout Standard
23225 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23231 \begin_layout Standard
23241 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23247 \begin_layout Subsection
23249 \begin_inset Index idx
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23261 name "sub:Functions"
23268 \begin_layout Standard
23272 \begin_inset space ~
23277 contains under the button
23282 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23287 a number of function macros, such as
23288 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23292 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23300 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23307 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23308 avoid confusions, because
23309 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23313 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23319 \begin_layout Standard
23320 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23322 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23326 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23332 \begin_layout Standard
23333 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23334 are placed, as described in section
23335 \begin_inset space ~
23339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23341 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23348 \begin_layout Subsection
23350 \begin_inset Index idx
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 \begin_layout Standard
23363 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23365 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23366 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23367 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23370 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23371 Our example is entered by typing
23376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23383 \begin_inset space ~
23387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23389 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23393 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23396 \begin_layout Standard
23397 \begin_inset Float table
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23408 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23412 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 \begin_inset Tabular
23423 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23424 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23426 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24009 \begin_layout Standard
24010 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24013 \begin_inset space ~
24021 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24024 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24028 \begin_layout Section
24029 Brackets and Delimiters
24030 \begin_inset Index idx
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 \begin_inset Index idx
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24052 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24059 \begin_layout Standard
24060 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24061 For some purposes, using just the keys
24066 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24067 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24068 toolbar delimiter icon
24071 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24075 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24076 \begin_inset Formula
24078 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24086 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24087 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24091 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24094 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24100 \begin_inset Formula
24102 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24110 \begin_layout Standard
24111 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24112 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24116 \begin_layout Standard
24117 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24118 left side and right side.
24119 If you use the option
24122 \begin_inset space ~
24127 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24128 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24129 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24134 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24137 \begin_layout Standard
24138 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24139 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24140 is to go inside the brackets.
24141 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24146 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24147 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24148 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24152 arg "math-delim ( )"
24158 \begin_layout Section
24159 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24160 \begin_inset Index idx
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24170 \begin_inset Index idx
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 \begin_inset Index idx
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24184 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24192 \begin_layout Standard
24193 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24196 \begin_inset space ~
24206 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24212 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24213 Here is an example:
24214 \begin_inset Formula
24216 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24225 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24226 \begin_inset space ~
24230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24232 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24237 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24238 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24239 This alignment is set in the box
24244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24292 for every column as default.
24293 For example, the sequence
24294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24305 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24306 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24307 corresponds to the relevant column.
24308 The result will look like this:
24309 \begin_inset Formula
24312 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24313 column & has & has\, right\\
24314 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24323 \begin_layout Standard
24324 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24327 arg "newline-insert newline"
24330 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24331 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24333 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24336 or the math toolbar.
24339 \begin_layout Standard
24340 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24341 It can be created with the menu
24343 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24344 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24346 \begin_inset space ~
24358 Here is an example:
24359 \begin_inset Formula
24373 \begin_layout Standard
24374 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24377 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24380 arg "newline-insert newline"
24384 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24389 arg "newline-insert newline"
24392 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24400 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24401 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24402 A new row is created by every further entry of
24405 arg "newline-insert newline"
24409 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24410 Here is an example:
24411 \begin_inset Formula
24413 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24414 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24419 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24420 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24421 \begin_inset Formula
24423 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24431 \begin_layout Standard
24432 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24439 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24440 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24443 reference "eq:asquared"
24448 The other types are described in section
24449 \begin_inset space ~
24453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24455 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24462 \begin_layout Section
24463 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24464 \begin_inset Index idx
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 Math ! Formula numbering
24474 \begin_inset Index idx
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 Math ! Referencing formulas
24484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24486 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24493 \begin_layout Standard
24494 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24496 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24497 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24499 \begin_inset space ~
24503 \begin_inset space ~
24511 arg "math-number-toggle"
24515 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24516 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24517 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24518 the document class.
24519 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24520 separated by a dot:
24521 \begin_inset Formula
24531 arg "math-number-toggle"
24534 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24535 You can only number displayed formulas.
24538 \begin_layout Standard
24539 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24541 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24542 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24544 \begin_inset space ~
24548 \begin_inset space ~
24556 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24559 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24560 \begin_inset Formula
24563 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24569 To number all lines use the shortcut
24572 arg "math-number-toggle"
24578 \begin_layout Standard
24579 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24582 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24583 A label is inserted with the menu
24585 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24594 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24595 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24596 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24608 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24609 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24610 We inserted in the following example the label
24611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24618 in the second line:
24619 \begin_inset Formula
24621 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24622 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24627 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24628 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24629 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24631 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24633 \begin_inset space ~
24641 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24645 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24646 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24647 as the formula number:
24650 \begin_layout Standard
24651 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24654 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24661 \begin_layout Standard
24662 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24663 \begin_inset space ~
24667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24669 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24674 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24682 \begin_layout Section
24683 User defined math macros
24684 \begin_inset Index idx
24687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 \begin_layout Standard
24697 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24698 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24699 Math macros are explained in section
24702 \begin_inset space ~
24714 \begin_layout Section
24718 \begin_layout Subsection
24720 \begin_inset Index idx
24723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 \begin_layout Standard
24733 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24734 To set a font in a formula, use the
24737 \begin_inset space ~
24747 arg "math-insert \\font"
24752 , or enter its command, listed in table
24753 \begin_inset space ~
24757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24759 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24766 \begin_layout Standard
24767 \begin_inset Float table
24772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24773 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24778 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24782 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 \begin_inset Tabular
24793 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24794 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24796 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24882 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25003 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25030 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25064 \begin_layout Standard
25065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25089 \begin_layout Standard
25090 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25091 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25096 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25097 space when you need a space in the box.
25098 Here is an example where
25099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25110 denotes the set of numbers:
25111 \begin_inset Formula
25113 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25121 \begin_layout Standard
25122 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25123 You can, for example, put a character in
25132 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25136 \begin_inset Newline newline
25139 So it is better not to use this feature.
25142 \begin_layout Standard
25143 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25144 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25148 \begin_inset Newline newline
25151 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25157 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25158 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25164 \begin_layout Standard
25171 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25174 \begin_layout Standard
25175 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25177 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25178 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25180 \begin_inset space ~
25188 \begin_layout Subsection
25190 \begin_inset Index idx
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 \begin_layout Standard
25203 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25205 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25209 \begin_inset space ~
25213 \begin_inset space ~
25221 \begin_inset space ~
25231 arg "math-insert \\font"
25243 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25244 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25245 Here is an example:
25246 \begin_inset Formula
25249 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25250 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25259 \begin_layout Subsection
25261 \begin_inset Index idx
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25273 \begin_layout Standard
25274 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25275 automatically chosen in most situations.
25293 For most characters,
25301 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25302 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25307 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25308 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25310 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25315 arg "math-insert \\style"
25321 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25322 For example, you can set
25323 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25326 , which is normally in
25335 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25339 The four styles are used in the following example:
25342 \begin_layout Standard
25343 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25347 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25351 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25355 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25361 \begin_layout Standard
25362 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25363 is set in a particular size with the menu
25365 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25367 \begin_inset space ~
25372 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25373 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25374 will be adjusted to correspond.
25375 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25386 \begin_layout Standard
25390 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25396 \begin_layout Section
25398 \begin_inset Index idx
25401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 \begin_inset Index idx
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 \begin_layout Standard
25421 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25422 (AMS) that are in common use.
25425 \begin_layout Subsection
25426 Enabling AMS-Support
25429 \begin_layout Standard
25430 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25431 the document by selecting the checkbox
25434 \begin_inset space ~
25438 \begin_inset space ~
25442 \begin_inset space ~
25449 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25453 \begin_inset Index idx
25456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 Document ! Settings
25465 \begin_inset space ~
25471 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25472 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25475 \begin_layout Subsection
25477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25479 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25484 \begin_inset Index idx
25487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25496 \begin_layout Standard
25497 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25498 LyX allows you to choose between
25519 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25520 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25526 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25529 \begin_layout Chapter
25533 \begin_layout Section
25535 \begin_inset Index idx
25538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25547 name "sec:Cross-References"
25554 \begin_layout Standard
25555 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25556 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25558 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25559 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25560 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25563 \begin_layout Enumerate
25567 \begin_layout Enumerate
25568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25570 name "enu:Second-item"
25577 \begin_layout Enumerate
25581 \begin_layout Standard
25582 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25584 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25587 or by pressing the toolbar button
25594 A gray label box like this:
25595 \begin_inset Graphics
25596 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25601 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25602 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25637 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25638 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25654 \begin_layout Standard
25655 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25657 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25660 or the toolbar button
25663 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25667 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25668 \begin_inset Graphics
25669 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25674 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25676 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25689 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25693 \begin_layout Standard
25694 As an alternative to
25696 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25699 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25704 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25705 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25707 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25719 \begin_layout Standard
25720 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25721 \begin_inset space ~
25725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25727 reference "enu:Second-item"
25734 \begin_layout Standard
25735 It is recommended to use a protected space
25739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25740 described in section
25741 \begin_inset space ~
25745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25747 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25756 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25757 line breaks between them.
25760 \begin_layout Standard
25761 There are six formats of cross-references:
25764 \begin_layout Description
25765 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25768 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25775 \begin_layout Description
25776 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25777 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25789 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25796 \begin_layout Description
25797 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25798 \begin_inset space ~
25802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25803 LatexCommand pageref
25804 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25811 \begin_layout Description
25813 \begin_inset space ~
25817 \begin_inset space ~
25820 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25822 LatexCommand vpageref
25823 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25828 \begin_inset Newline newline
25831 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25832 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25833 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25834 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25835 it prints “on the next page”.
25836 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25839 \begin_layout Description
25841 \begin_inset space ~
25845 \begin_inset space ~
25849 \begin_inset space ~
25852 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25855 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25860 \begin_inset Newline newline
25863 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25869 ; otherwise it behaves like
25873 \begin_inset space ~
25877 \begin_inset space ~
25886 \begin_layout Description
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25891 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25892 \begin_inset Newline newline
25896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25904 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25913 \begin_inset Index idx
25916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25917 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25923 \begin_inset Index idx
25926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25927 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25938 \begin_inset Newline newline
25941 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25944 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25948 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25949 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25957 is the default and preferred because
25961 supports only English documents.
25962 The format is specified by using the command
25974 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25975 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25988 ) can be done with this command
25989 \begin_inset Newline newline
25996 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26001 \begin_inset Newline newline
26004 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26008 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26015 \begin_layout Description
26017 \begin_inset space ~
26020 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26022 LatexCommand nameref
26023 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26030 \begin_layout Standard
26031 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26032 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26033 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26037 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26041 \begin_layout Standard
26042 You can only use the style
26046 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26050 is always possible.
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26055 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26057 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26058 \begin_inset space ~
26062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26064 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26076 \begin_inset space ~
26080 \begin_inset space ~
26085 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26086 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26089 \begin_inset space ~
26094 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26095 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26098 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 You can change labels at any time.
26106 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26107 do not need to think about this.
26110 \begin_layout Standard
26111 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26112 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26113 instead of the reference.
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 References are described in detail in the section
26118 \begin_inset space ~
26122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26132 \begin_inset space ~
26140 \begin_layout Section
26141 Table of Contents and other Listings
26142 \begin_inset Index idx
26145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26152 \begin_inset Index idx
26155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26171 \begin_layout Subsection
26173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26175 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26182 \begin_layout Standard
26183 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26185 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26186 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26188 \begin_inset space ~
26192 \begin_inset space ~
26198 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26199 If you click on it, the
26203 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26204 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26205 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26207 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26209 \begin_inset space ~
26214 that is described in section
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26221 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26228 \begin_layout Standard
26229 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26230 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26232 \begin_inset space ~
26236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26238 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26242 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26250 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26254 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26256 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26259 \begin_layout Subsection
26260 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26263 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26270 \begin_layout Standard
26271 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26272 You can insert them via the
26274 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26278 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26281 \begin_layout Section
26282 URLs and Hyperlinks
26283 \begin_inset Index idx
26286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 \begin_inset Index idx
26296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 \begin_layout Subsection
26307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26316 \begin_layout Standard
26317 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26325 \begin_layout Standard
26326 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26327 \begin_inset Flex URL
26330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26340 \begin_layout Standard
26341 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26347 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26351 \begin_layout Standard
26352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26360 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26368 \begin_layout Subsection
26370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26372 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26379 \begin_layout Standard
26380 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26382 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26385 or with the toolbar button
26392 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26401 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26402 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26405 name "LyX's homepage"
26406 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26410 , an Email address like this:
26411 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26413 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26414 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26419 , or a link to a file.
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26436 to the link target.
26439 \begin_layout Standard
26440 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26441 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26442 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26443 the text style dialog.
26444 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26450 name "LyX's homepage"
26451 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26458 \begin_layout Standard
26459 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26463 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26465 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26466 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26470 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26472 \begin_inset Newline newline
26480 \begin_inset Newline newline
26487 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26490 \begin_layout Section
26492 \begin_inset Index idx
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26504 name "sec:Appendices"
26511 \begin_layout Standard
26512 Appendices are created with the menu
26514 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26516 \begin_inset space ~
26520 \begin_inset space ~
26526 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26527 as the appendix part of the book.
26528 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26531 \begin_layout Standard
26532 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26533 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26534 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26535 and the subsection number.
26536 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26540 \begin_layout Standard
26542 \begin_inset space ~
26546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26548 reference "chap:Credits"
26553 \begin_inset space ~
26557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26559 reference "sub:Export"
26566 \begin_layout Section
26568 \begin_inset Index idx
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26580 name "sec:Bibliography"
26587 \begin_layout Standard
26588 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26589 You can include a bibliography database,
26593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 Known under the name
26595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26607 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26608 manually, using the paragraph environment
26612 , which was described in section
26613 \begin_inset space ~
26617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26619 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26624 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26625 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26629 use a bibliography database.
26632 \begin_layout Subsection
26633 The Bibliography Environment
26636 \begin_layout Standard
26641 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26643 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26652 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26654 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26663 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26666 \begin_layout Standard
26667 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26669 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26672 or the toolbar button
26675 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26679 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26680 containing the available citations.
26681 Select one or more keys from the list and
26691 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26692 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26696 \begin_layout Standard
26697 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26698 entry with surrounding brackets.
26703 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26704 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26719 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26724 key "latexcompanion"
26731 \begin_layout Standard
26732 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26733 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26742 \begin_layout Standard
26743 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26746 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26748 \begin_inset space ~
26756 arg "layout-paragraph"
26760 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26763 \begin_layout Subsection
26764 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26765 \begin_inset Index idx
26768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26769 Bibliography ! Databases
26775 \begin_inset Index idx
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26787 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26794 \begin_layout Standard
26795 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26801 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26803 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26804 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26809 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26811 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26812 your working field in a database.
26813 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26814 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26815 list for that document.
26816 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26820 \begin_layout Standard
26821 The database is a text file with the file extension
26822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26833 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26834 The format is explained in
26835 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26841 and in the LaTeX books (
26842 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26844 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26849 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26850 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26851 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26852 \begin_inset Flex URL
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26857 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26865 \begin_layout Standard
26866 To use a database, use the menu
26868 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26873 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 \begin_inset space ~
26892 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26893 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26900 Add bibliography to TOC
26902 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26907 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26908 in the document or just the cited references.
26911 \begin_layout Standard
26912 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26924 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26925 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26926 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26928 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26934 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26935 \begin_inset Newline newline
26939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26941 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26953 \begin_layout Standard
26954 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26957 \begin_layout Standard
26958 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26959 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26965 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26966 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26971 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26972 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26973 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 The following variants are possible:
26991 \begin_layout Description
26992 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26993 with other bibliography packages (e.
26994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26998 \begin_inset space \space{}
27005 ), only with the package
27009 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27013 \begin_layout Description
27014 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27015 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27016 with all bibliography packages, except
27021 \begin_layout Description
27022 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27027 , works with all bibliography packages
27030 \begin_layout Standard
27031 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27033 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27048 \begin_layout Standard
27049 When you select the option
27051 Sectioned bibliography
27055 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27056 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27059 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27060 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27062 Customizing Bibliographies
27070 Additional Features
27075 \begin_layout Standard
27076 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27077 the two methods of creating them.
27078 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27079 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27080 We used the style file
27084 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27087 \begin_layout Subsection
27088 Bibliography layout
27089 \begin_inset Index idx
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27093 Bibliography ! Layout
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27103 For this feature you need to enable the option
27109 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27113 \begin_inset Index idx
27116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27117 Document ! Settings
27127 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27128 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27129 in the previous section.
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27134 the citation reference window.
27135 Here is an example where the text
27136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27140 \begin_inset space ~
27144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27147 appears after the reference:
27150 \begin_layout Standard
27152 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27155 key "latexcompanion"
27162 \begin_layout Section
27164 \begin_inset Index idx
27167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27186 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27188 \begin_inset space ~
27193 or the toolbar button
27200 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27201 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27202 by LyX as the index entry.
27205 \begin_layout Standard
27206 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27208 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27209 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27211 \begin_inset space ~
27217 A light blue box labeled
27218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27229 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27230 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27234 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27235 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27239 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27246 \begin_layout Subsection
27247 Grouping Index Entries
27248 \begin_inset Index idx
27251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27260 \begin_layout Standard
27261 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27263 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27264 lists under the entry
27265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27273 First we create the entry
27274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27282 \begin_inset space ~
27286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27288 reference "sub:Lists"
27293 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27294 \begin_inset space ~
27298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27300 reference "sec:Itemize"
27304 , we insert the command
27307 \begin_layout Standard
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27317 \begin_layout Standard
27323 \begin_layout Standard
27324 for the enumerated list in section
27325 \begin_inset space ~
27329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27331 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27338 \begin_layout Standard
27339 The exclamation mark
27340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27347 marks the grouping levels.
27348 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27349 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27350 If we don't have an index entry for
27351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27358 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27361 \begin_layout Subsection
27363 \begin_inset Index idx
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27367 Index ! Page ranges
27375 \begin_layout Standard
27376 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27378 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27379 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27380 an index entry in section
27381 \begin_inset space ~
27385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27387 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27397 Paragraph environments|(
27400 \begin_layout Standard
27401 and another entry at the end of section
27402 \begin_inset space ~
27406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27408 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27415 \begin_layout Standard
27418 Paragraph environments|)
27421 \begin_layout Standard
27423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27446 respectively start and end the index range.
27447 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27448 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27449 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27450 An example is the index entry
27451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27454 Document ! Settings
27455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27461 \begin_layout Subsection
27463 \begin_inset Index idx
27466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 Index ! Cross referencing
27475 \begin_layout Standard
27476 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27477 We referred for example in the index entry
27478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27486 \begin_inset space ~
27490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27492 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27496 ) to the index entry
27497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27504 in the same section using the entry
27507 \begin_layout Standard
27510 GIF|see{Image formats}
27513 \begin_layout Standard
27514 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27515 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27516 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27519 \begin_layout Subsection
27521 \begin_inset Index idx
27524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 Index ! Entry order
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27534 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27535 follow the rules for the index order.
27536 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27541 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27543 \begin_inset space ~
27547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27549 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27558 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27559 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27584 \begin_inset Index idx
27587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27588 Dummy entries ! maïs
27594 \begin_inset Index idx
27597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 Dummy entries ! maître
27604 \begin_inset Index idx
27607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27608 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27613 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27614 maïs, maison, maître.
27615 To achieve this, we use the command
27618 \begin_layout Standard
27621 previous entry@current entry
27624 \begin_layout Standard
27625 In our case we want to have
27626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27641 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27644 \begin_layout Standard
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27651 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27652 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27653 See the next subsection for an example.
27656 \begin_layout Standard
27657 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27664 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27669 to generate the index (see sec.
27670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27676 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27685 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27693 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27697 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27698 index commands start with
27699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27711 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27716 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27719 \begin_layout Standard
27731 \begin_layout Standard
27743 \begin_layout Subsection
27745 \begin_inset Index idx
27748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27749 Index ! Entry layout
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27758 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27759 \begin_inset Index idx
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27765 This is an italic dummy entry
27770 You can also format the page number using the character
27771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27778 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27779 We can write for example
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27785 italic page number:|textit
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27789 to get the page number in italic.
27790 \begin_inset Index idx
27793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27799 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27817 \begin_inset space ~
27823 Have a look at section
27824 \begin_inset space ~
27828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27830 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27834 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27837 \begin_layout Standard
27838 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27846 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27850 to generate the index, see sec.
27851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27857 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27866 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27871 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27875 key "latexcompanion"
27887 \begin_layout Standard
27888 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27890 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27891 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27892 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27893 If so, put the following in the preamble
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27908 \begin_layout Standard
27912 \begin_layout Standard
27918 \begin_layout Standard
27919 in the index entry.
27920 \begin_inset Index idx
27923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27929 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27930 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27931 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27935 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27936 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27937 a bold font for all index entries.
27938 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27950 documentation for details,
27951 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27953 key "makeindex,xindy"
27960 \begin_layout Subsection
27962 \begin_inset Index idx
27965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27974 name "sub:Index-Program"
27981 \begin_layout Standard
27982 If the index generation program
27986 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27990 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27999 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28000 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28001 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28002 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28003 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28013 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28014 dialog, see section
28015 \begin_inset space ~
28019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28021 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28026 The available options are listed and explained in
28027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28029 key "makeindex,xindy"
28034 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28040 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28043 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28044 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28048 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28049 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28052 \begin_layout Subsection
28056 \begin_layout Standard
28057 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28058 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28066 next to the standard index.
28067 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28068 that add this feature.
28074 \begin_inset Index idx
28077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28078 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28083 package to generate multiple indexes.
28084 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28089 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28090 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28097 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28098 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28099 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28107 \begin_layout Standard
28108 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28110 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28111 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28114 and select the option
28116 Use multiple Indexes
28123 already contains the standard index
28124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28132 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28133 also appear as a heading) to the
28137 input field and press the
28142 The new index now also appears in the list.
28143 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28147 \begin_layout Standard
28148 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28151 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28158 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28159 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28160 are additional features:
28163 \begin_layout Itemize
28164 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28165 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28168 \begin_layout Itemize
28169 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28170 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28178 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28179 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28180 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28181 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28184 \begin_layout Section
28185 Nomenclature/Glossary
28186 \begin_inset Index idx
28189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28196 \begin_inset Index idx
28199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28230 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28238 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28239 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28240 called nomenclature or glossary.
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28244 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28250 \begin_inset Index idx
28253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28254 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28260 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28267 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28272 and then use the menu
28274 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28280 \begin_inset space ~
28285 or the toolbar button
28288 arg "nomencl-insert"
28293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28304 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28308 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28309 The first is the term or
28313 that you wish to define.
28318 of the term or symbol.
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28338 \begin_layout Subsection
28339 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28340 \begin_inset Index idx
28343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28344 Nomenclature ! Layout
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28357 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28363 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28371 \begin_inset Newline newline
28379 \begin_inset Newline newline
28385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28392 character starts/ends the formula.
28393 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28405 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28416 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28417 \begin_inset space ~
28421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28423 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28430 \begin_layout Standard
28434 \begin_inset space ~
28439 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28440 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28445 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28452 in this document is:
28453 \begin_inset Newline newline
28458 dummy entry for the character
28463 \begin_inset Newline newline
28475 \begin_inset space ~
28485 font use the command
28514 \begin_layout Standard
28515 If the characters |
28516 \begin_inset space \space{}
28520 \begin_inset space \space{}
28524 \begin_inset space \space{}
28528 \begin_inset space \space{}
28532 \begin_inset space \space{}
28535 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28536 a quote character in front of them.
28537 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28538 LatexCommand nomenclature
28539 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28540 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28547 \begin_layout Subsection
28548 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28549 \begin_inset Index idx
28552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28553 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28563 the symbol definition.
28564 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28566 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28569 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28570 LatexCommand nomenclature
28572 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28579 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28583 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28584 LatexCommand nomenclature
28587 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28592 They will be sorted by
28593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28619 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28622 will be sorted before the
28626 since the character
28627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28634 is considered in sorting.
28637 \begin_layout Standard
28638 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28641 \begin_inset space ~
28646 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28647 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28649 For the example given, you can insert
28653 in this field for the
28654 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28661 will be located before
28662 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28669 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28674 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28683 \begin_layout Subsection
28684 Nomenclature Options
28685 \begin_inset Index idx
28688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28689 Nomenclature ! Options
28697 \begin_layout Standard
28702 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28703 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28706 \begin_layout Description
28707 refeq Appends the phrase
28708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28723 to every nomenclature entry, where
28729 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28732 \begin_layout Description
28733 refpage Appends the phrase
28734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28749 to every nomenclature entry, where
28755 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28758 \begin_layout Description
28759 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28762 \begin_layout Standard
28763 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28764 class options list in the
28766 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28770 In this document the options
28777 \begin_layout Standard
28778 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28784 \begin_layout Standard
28785 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28786 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28791 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28794 \begin_layout Description
28804 \begin_layout Description
28807 nomrefpage Like the
28814 \begin_layout Description
28817 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28826 \begin_layout Description
28830 \begin_inset space ~
28836 \begin_inset space ~
28841 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28844 \begin_layout Standard
28846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28853 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28854 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28865 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28868 \begin_inset Newline newline
28875 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28880 \begin_inset Newline newline
28884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28899 by their translation.
28902 \begin_layout Subsection
28903 Printing the Nomenclature
28904 \begin_inset Index idx
28907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28908 Nomenclature ! Printing
28916 \begin_layout Standard
28917 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28919 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28920 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28936 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28937 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28938 You can choose between these settings:
28941 \begin_layout Description
28942 Default a space of 1
28943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28949 \begin_layout Description
28951 \begin_inset space ~
28955 \begin_inset space ~
28958 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28961 \begin_layout Description
28962 Custom custom space
28965 \begin_layout Standard
28966 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28975 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28983 For example, in order to change the name to
28987 , add the following line to the preamble:
28990 \begin_layout Standard
28998 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29001 \begin_layout Subsection
29002 Nomenclature Program
29003 \begin_inset Index idx
29006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 Nomenclature ! Program
29013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29015 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29022 \begin_layout Standard
29023 LyX uses the program
29027 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29028 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29033 by adding options, see section
29034 \begin_inset space ~
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29040 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29045 The available options are listed and explained in
29046 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29048 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29055 \begin_layout Section
29057 \begin_inset Index idx
29060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29067 \begin_inset Index idx
29070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29071 Document ! Branches
29077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29079 name "sec:Branches"
29086 \begin_layout Standard
29087 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29088 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29089 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29090 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29095 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29096 To create a branch, either select the menu
29098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29099 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29102 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29104 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29111 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29112 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29113 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29114 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29115 (see below for an example).
29116 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29117 to the name of the other) and to add
29118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29130 \begin_inset space ~
29133 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29134 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29139 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29141 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29144 where you can choose a branch.
29145 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29149 \begin_layout Standard
29150 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29151 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29154 \begin_layout Standard
29155 \begin_inset Branch Question
29158 \begin_layout Standard
29159 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29167 \begin_layout Standard
29168 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29171 \begin_layout Standard
29172 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29187 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29188 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29191 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29192 Consider for example a file
29193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29200 which has the above branches.
29202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29209 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29233 branch were inactive,
29234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29249 branch was active, likewise
29250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29265 branch was active, and
29266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29269 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29273 if both branches were active.
29274 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29277 \begin_layout Standard
29278 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29284 \begin_layout Standard
29285 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29286 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29288 For example you can define for the question branch
29292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29293 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29294 \begin_inset space ~
29298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29300 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29312 \begin_layout Standard
29322 \begin_layout Standard
29332 \begin_layout Standard
29333 and for the answer branch
29336 \begin_layout Standard
29346 \begin_layout Standard
29356 \begin_layout Standard
29357 \begin_inset Branch Question
29360 \begin_layout Standard
29364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29393 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29396 \begin_layout Standard
29400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29429 Now it is possible to use the
29433 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29440 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29443 commands to obtain conditional output.
29444 Here is an example formula where only the
29451 \begin_inset Formula
29453 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29461 \begin_layout Standard
29462 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29471 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29477 \begin_inset space \space{}
29480 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29481 For this advanced usage, see the
29486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29489 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29496 \begin_layout Section
29498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29500 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29505 \begin_inset Index idx
29508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29517 \begin_layout Standard
29520 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29521 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29524 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29526 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29531 \begin_inset Index idx
29534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29535 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29540 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29541 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29542 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29543 part of the document.
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29548 The header information in the dialog tab
29552 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29553 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29554 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29555 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29559 \begin_inset space ~
29563 \begin_inset space ~
29568 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29569 title and author entries.
29573 \begin_inset space ~
29577 \begin_inset space ~
29581 \begin_inset space ~
29586 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29589 \begin_layout Standard
29590 You can specify in the dialog tab
29594 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29599 \begin_inset space ~
29603 \begin_inset space ~
29607 \begin_inset space ~
29612 option allows long links to be split;
29615 \begin_inset space ~
29619 \begin_inset space ~
29623 \begin_inset space ~
29631 \begin_inset space ~
29636 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29639 \begin_inset space ~
29644 colors the different links.
29645 The default colors are:
29648 \begin_layout Labeling
29649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29654 for hyperlinks and URLs
29657 \begin_layout Labeling
29658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29666 \begin_layout Labeling
29667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29675 \begin_layout Standard
29676 but you can change these in the field
29681 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29687 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29695 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29696 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29697 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29705 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29706 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29707 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29717 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29718 when opening the PDF.
29720 \begin_inset space ~
29723 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29724 \begin_inset space ~
29727 1 will only display the sections.
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29731 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29732 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29738 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29739 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29748 \begin_layout Section
29749 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29752 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29759 \begin_layout Subsection
29761 \begin_inset Index idx
29764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29773 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29782 constructs, but not all.
29783 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29784 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29785 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29786 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29787 and their commands.
29790 \begin_layout Standard
29791 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29793 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29795 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29808 \begin_inset space ~
29813 or by the toolbar button
29826 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29834 \begin_layout Standard
29835 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29836 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29837 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29838 using the LaTeX-command
29844 , you can write the command part
29850 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29854 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29855 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29856 the following example:
29859 \begin_layout Standard
29860 \begin_inset Graphics
29861 filename clipart/ERT.png
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29873 \begin_layout Standard
29874 This is a line with a
29878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29901 \begin_layout Standard
29902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29910 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29911 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29919 \begin_layout Subsection
29920 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29921 \begin_inset Argument 1
29924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29931 \begin_inset Index idx
29934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29943 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29950 \begin_layout Standard
29951 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29952 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29953 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29962 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29963 any time if you know the right commands.
29964 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29965 is the end of the day.
29966 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29967 all caption labels bold.
29968 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29970 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29975 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29976 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29977 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29988 \begin_layout Standard
29989 As result you find that the package
29994 \begin_inset Index idx
29997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30004 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30009 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30024 \begin_inset space ~
30032 \begin_layout Standard
30037 usepackage[options]{package name}
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30041 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30042 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30043 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30047 In your case the package name is
30052 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30057 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30058 So you add the command
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30066 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30069 \begin_layout Standard
30070 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30075 For more commands provided by the
30079 package, have a look at its documentation,
30080 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30097 For example if you use a
30101 class, you don't need the package
30105 , you can instead write
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30113 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30120 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30121 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30128 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30131 \begin_layout Standard
30132 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30133 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30135 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30136 the previous section.
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30142 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30144 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30172 \begin_inset Note Note
30175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30176 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30184 \begin_layout Left Header
30185 \begin_inset Argument 1
30188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30208 \begin_inset Note Note
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30212 defines the header line as described below
30220 \begin_layout Center Header
30221 \begin_inset Argument 1
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 \begin_layout Right Header
30234 \begin_inset Argument 1
30237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30258 \begin_layout Left Footer
30259 \begin_inset Argument 1
30262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30283 \begin_layout Center Footer
30284 \begin_inset Argument 1
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30298 \begin_inset Newline newline
30302 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30308 \begin_layout Right Footer
30309 \begin_inset Argument 1
30312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30334 \begin_layout Section
30335 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30338 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30343 \begin_inset Index idx
30346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30347 Document ! Header/Footer line
30353 \begin_inset Index idx
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30366 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30370 \begin_inset space ~
30381 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30387 \begin_inset space ~
30393 As a second step add in the menu
30395 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30396 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30403 Custom Header/Footerlines
30404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30408 This module offers the following 6
30409 \begin_inset space ~
30415 \begin_layout Description
30417 \begin_inset space ~
30421 \begin_inset space ~
30425 \begin_inset space ~
30429 \begin_inset space ~
30433 \begin_inset space ~
30439 \begin_layout Description
30441 \begin_inset space ~
30445 \begin_inset space ~
30449 \begin_inset space ~
30453 \begin_inset space ~
30457 \begin_inset space ~
30463 \begin_layout Standard
30464 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30467 \begin_layout Standard
30468 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30469 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30471 \begin_inset space ~
30475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30477 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30481 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30484 \begin_layout Standard
30485 \begin_inset Float figure
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30494 \begin_inset Tabular
30495 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30496 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30497 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30499 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30519 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30548 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30559 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30563 The normal text on the page goes here.
30564 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30566 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30567 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30572 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30639 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30662 name "fig:Page-layout"
30666 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30680 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30688 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30692 \begin_inset space ~
30697 is set to “Default”.
30698 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30707 \begin_layout Subsection
30711 \begin_layout Standard
30712 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30713 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30714 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30715 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30717 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30718 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30721 \begin_layout Standard
30722 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30725 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30738 \begin_inset space ~
30746 \begin_layout Description
30749 thepage prints the current page number
30752 \begin_layout Description
30755 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30758 \begin_layout Description
30761 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30764 \begin_layout Description
30767 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30768 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30775 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30778 because it usually goes in a left header.
30781 \begin_layout Description
30784 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30785 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30787 It is normally used in the right header.
30790 \begin_layout Subsection
30791 Default header/footer
30794 \begin_layout Standard
30795 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30796 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30797 footer has the page number.
30798 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30799 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30800 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30803 \begin_inset space ~
30811 \begin_layout Subsection
30815 \begin_layout Standard
30816 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30817 Some pages are different.
30818 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30819 a new part or chapter in your book.
30820 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30821 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30822 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30826 Header and footer decoration line
30829 \begin_layout Standard
30830 By default, you get a 0.4
30831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30834 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30835 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30847 in the following way:
30850 \begin_layout Standard
30857 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30860 \begin_layout Standard
30861 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30870 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30878 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30879 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30880 \begin_inset space ~
30884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30894 Several header/footer lines
30897 \begin_layout Standard
30898 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30899 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30900 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30902 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30916 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30917 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30930 \begin_inset space ~
30938 \begin_layout Standard
30945 headheight}{height}
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30949 where height is a size in standard units.
30950 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30951 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30952 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30954 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30971 \begin_inset space ~
30976 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30981 \begin_inset Index idx
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30991 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30992 for your header/footer.
30995 \begin_layout Subsection
30999 \begin_layout Standard
31000 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31001 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31002 This example consists of the following definition:
31005 \begin_layout Description
31007 \begin_inset space ~
31016 , empty optional argument
31019 \begin_layout Description
31021 \begin_inset space ~
31024 Header empty, empty optional argument
31027 \begin_layout Description
31029 \begin_inset space ~
31038 in the optional argument
31041 \begin_layout Description
31043 \begin_inset space ~
31052 in the optional argument
31055 \begin_layout Description
31057 \begin_inset space ~
31069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31073 \begin_inset Newline newline
31077 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31084 in the optional argument
31087 \begin_layout Description
31089 \begin_inset space ~
31098 , empty optional argument
31101 \begin_layout Description
31104 headrulewidth set to 2
31105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31112 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31113 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31119 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31128 \begin_layout Standard
31129 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31135 \begin_layout Standard
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31143 pagestyle{headings}
31149 \begin_inset Note Note
31152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31153 switches back to page style with the default headings
31161 \begin_layout Section
31162 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31165 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31170 \begin_inset Index idx
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31180 \begin_inset Index idx
31183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31192 \begin_layout Standard
31193 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31194 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31195 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31198 \begin_layout Subsection
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31208 \begin_inset Index idx
31211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31212 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31217 (on some systems named simply
31222 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31224 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31230 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31231 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31239 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31240 automatically installed together with LyX.
31243 \begin_layout Subsection
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31248 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31249 LaTeX, activate the option
31252 \begin_inset space ~
31259 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31265 \begin_inset space ~
31269 \begin_inset space ~
31272 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31279 \begin_inset space ~
31292 \begin_inset space ~
31297 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31300 \begin_layout Standard
31301 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31305 \begin_inset space ~
31313 \begin_inset space ~
31321 \begin_layout Standard
31322 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31335 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31336 generated by activating the option
31339 \begin_inset space ~
31345 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31353 \begin_layout Subsection
31354 Selected document parts
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31359 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31360 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31361 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31363 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31367 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31368 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31369 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31373 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31379 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31390 is explained in section
31392 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31407 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31408 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31410 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31412 Here is the result:
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31416 \begin_inset Preview
31418 \begin_layout Standard
31423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31427 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31433 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31443 height_special "totalheight"
31446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31471 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31477 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31499 \begin_layout Standard
31500 Previewing works also for colors.
31501 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31519 is explained in section
31526 \begin_inset space ~
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31540 \begin_inset Preview
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31565 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31570 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31590 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31597 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31598 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31599 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31601 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31602 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31603 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31604 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31608 \begin_layout Subsection
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31613 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31616 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31618 \begin_inset space ~
31623 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31624 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31626 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31627 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31628 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31629 the source view window.
31634 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31635 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31636 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31639 \begin_layout Section
31640 Advanced Find and Replace
31641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31643 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31648 \begin_inset Index idx
31651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31670 \begin_layout Subsection
31674 \begin_layout Standard
31675 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31676 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31677 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31678 The key-features are:
31681 \begin_layout Itemize
31682 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31683 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31684 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31688 \begin_layout Itemize
31689 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31690 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31691 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31692 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31695 \begin_layout Itemize
31696 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31697 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31698 outside of mathematics environments
31701 \begin_layout Itemize
31702 Search may be widened to a specific
31707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31711 \begin_inset space ~
31714 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31715 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31722 \begin_layout Itemize
31723 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31724 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31729 \begin_inset space ~
31732 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31735 \begin_layout Subsection
31739 \begin_layout Standard
31740 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31742 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31755 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31758 ) or the toolbar button
31761 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31767 Advanced Find and Replace
31772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31776 \begin_layout Standard
31781 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31785 \begin_inset space ~
31790 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31793 arg "break-paragraph"
31797 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31798 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31802 arg "break-paragraph"
31805 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31809 searches backwards.
31812 \begin_layout Standard
31816 \begin_inset space ~
31821 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31830 \begin_inset space ~
31835 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31839 Searching for mathematics
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 Mathematical formulas, such as
31844 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31847 or something more complex like
31848 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31851 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31856 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31857 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31858 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31859 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31869 \begin_layout Standard
31870 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31871 This is done by switching to the
31875 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31880 This way, entering in the
31887 \begin_layout Itemize
31888 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31889 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31892 \begin_layout Itemize
31893 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31894 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31897 \begin_layout Itemize
31898 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31899 of it only within section headings.
31900 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31901 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31905 \begin_layout Itemize
31906 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31907 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31910 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 The entries made in the
31919 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31922 \begin_inset space ~
31928 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31932 button or alternatively press
31935 arg "break-paragraph"
31942 while the cursor is in the
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31953 \begin_layout Standard
31954 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31955 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31959 \begin_layout Itemize
31960 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31961 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31969 with its typewriter version
31970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31984 \begin_layout Itemize
31985 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31991 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32003 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32010 (you may want to enable the
32013 \begin_inset space ~
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32026 options and disable the
32034 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32042 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32043 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32047 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32050 , or occurrences of
32051 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32055 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32061 \begin_layout Subsection
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32066 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32071 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32073 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32075 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32084 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32090 This is done with the context menu
32092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32093 Insert Regular Expression
32095 while the cursor is in the
32100 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32101 expression matching rules
32105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32106 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32112 \begin_inset space ~
32115 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32116 to match expressions.
32121 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32122 same text in the document.
32123 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32124 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32127 \begin_layout Enumerate
32128 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32133 editor the fraction
32134 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32138 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32141 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32142 fractions with the given denominator.
32145 \begin_layout Enumerate
32146 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32158 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32163 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32164 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32165 Also, by inserting a
32166 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32169 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32170 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32174 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32175 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32176 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32179 , and referring back to them through
32180 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32184 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32188 For example, try searching with the regexp
32189 \begin_inset Newline newline
32192 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32195 \begin_inset Newline newline
32198 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32201 \begin_layout Standard
32202 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32205 \begin_layout Standard
32206 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32214 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32215 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32216 sub-expressions is absolute.
32218 \begin_inset space ~
32222 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32225 always refers to the first occurrence of
32226 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32229 in all entered regexps.
32237 \begin_layout Section
32239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32241 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32246 \begin_inset Index idx
32249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 \begin_layout Standard
32259 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32262 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32269 key or the toolbar button
32272 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32275 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32276 beginning of the currently selected text.
32277 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32278 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32279 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32280 scrolled so that it is visible.
32281 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32282 n, if any could be found.
32283 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32287 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32288 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32292 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32295 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32299 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32300 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32301 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32302 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32313 arg "dialog-show character"
32316 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32317 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32320 \begin_layout Standard
32321 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32322 \begin_inset Newline newline
32326 \begin_inset Flex URL
32329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32331 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32337 \begin_inset Newline newline
32341 \begin_inset space ~
32344 files for each language.
32345 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32346 \begin_inset space ~
32349 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32358 \begin_inset Newline newline
32361 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32362 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32363 but in most cases these are
32379 is the language code.
32382 \begin_layout Subsection
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32389 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32390 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32392 \begin_inset space ~
32395 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32398 you can set the following things:
32401 \begin_layout Description
32403 \begin_inset space ~
32406 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32407 Depending on your platform,
32421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32422 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32423 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32438 \begin_layout Description
32440 \begin_inset space ~
32443 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32444 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32447 \begin_layout Description
32449 \begin_inset space ~
32452 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32458 \begin_inset space \space{}
32462 This should normally not be needed.
32465 \begin_layout Description
32467 \begin_inset space ~
32471 \begin_inset space ~
32474 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32486 \begin_layout Description
32488 \begin_inset space ~
32491 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32492 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32493 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32494 appear in a context menu.
32495 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32499 \begin_layout Description
32501 \begin_inset space ~
32505 \begin_inset space ~
32509 \begin_inset space ~
32512 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32516 \begin_layout Section
32518 \begin_inset Index idx
32521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32530 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32538 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32539 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32551 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32560 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32561 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32562 which are available for many languages.
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32566 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32570 \begin_layout Subsection
32571 Setting up the thesaurus
32574 \begin_layout Standard
32583 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32587 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32592 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32598 \begin_inset space ~
32606 For instance, the US English files are named:
32609 \begin_layout Itemize
32613 \begin_layout Itemize
32617 \begin_layout Standard
32626 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32627 and you just need to point LyX (in
32629 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32630 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32631 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32633 \begin_inset space ~
32638 ) to the path where they are installed.
32642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32643 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32644 ies, typical locations are
32650 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32654 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32658 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32661 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32667 LibreOffice-<Version>
32674 On the Mac, the default location is
32676 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32677 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32678 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32679 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32680 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32681 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32689 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32690 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32691 correct place right away.
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32696 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32700 \begin_layout Itemize
32701 \begin_inset Flex URL
32704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32714 \begin_layout Standard
32715 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32716 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32718 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32719 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32720 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32722 \begin_inset space ~
32728 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32729 and point LyX there.
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32735 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32738 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32744 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32747 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32755 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32756 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32757 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32759 \begin_inset space ~
32764 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32767 \begin_layout Subsection
32768 Using the thesaurus
32771 \begin_layout Standard
32772 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32774 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32777 or the toolbar button
32780 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32783 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32785 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32787 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32788 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32789 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32798 ), related terms (such as
32801 \begin_inset space ~
32810 ), compounds (such as
32813 \begin_inset space ~
32822 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32831 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32836 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32842 the dictionary, such as the above
32846 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32851 \begin_inset space \space{}
32854 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32855 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32856 For example, looking up the word form
32860 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32865 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32870 \begin_inset space \space{}
32881 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32882 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32883 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32886 \begin_layout Section
32888 \begin_inset Index idx
32891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32898 \begin_inset Index idx
32901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32902 Document ! Change Tracking
32908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32910 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32917 \begin_layout Standard
32918 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32919 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32920 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32921 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32925 \begin_inset space ~
32928 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32938 \begin_layout Standard
32939 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32953 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32954 You can change the color in
32956 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32957 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32959 \begin_inset space ~
32963 \begin_inset space ~
32968 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32974 \begin_inset Index idx
32977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32978 Color ! Change tracking
32983 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32984 the cursor is in changed text.
32985 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32988 arg "changes-merge"
32994 \begin_layout Standard
32995 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32996 \begin_inset Index idx
32999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 \begin_layout Standard
33009 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33015 \begin_layout Standard
33016 \begin_inset Graphics
33017 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33025 \begin_layout Standard
33026 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33032 \begin_layout Standard
33033 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33036 \begin_layout Standard
33037 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33043 \begin_layout Standard
33044 \begin_inset Tabular
33045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33046 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33047 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33048 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33058 arg "changes-track"
33066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33072 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33074 \begin_inset space ~
33077 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33079 \begin_inset space ~
33088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33097 arg "changes-output"
33105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33111 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33113 \begin_inset space ~
33116 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33118 \begin_inset space ~
33122 \begin_inset space ~
33126 \begin_inset space ~
33135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33156 Jumps to the next change
33162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 arg "change-accept"
33179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33185 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33187 \begin_inset space ~
33190 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33192 \begin_inset space ~
33201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33210 arg "change-reject"
33218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33224 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33229 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33249 arg "changes-merge"
33257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33263 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33265 \begin_inset space ~
33268 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33270 \begin_inset space ~
33279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33288 arg "all-changes-accept"
33296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33302 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33304 \begin_inset space ~
33307 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33309 \begin_inset space ~
33313 \begin_inset space ~
33322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 arg "all-changes-reject"
33339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33345 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33350 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33352 \begin_inset space ~
33356 \begin_inset space ~
33365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33389 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33436 \begin_inset space ~
33452 \begin_layout Standard
33453 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33459 \begin_layout Standard
33460 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33481 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33482 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33483 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33484 the next change after the current cursor position.
33485 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33486 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33487 step to the next change.
33488 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33491 \begin_layout Standard
33492 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33493 to describe a change.
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33502 \begin_inset Index idx
33505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33506 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33512 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33519 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33522 \begin_layout Section
33523 Comparison of Documents
33524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33526 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33531 \begin_inset Index idx
33534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 Comparison of documents
33543 \begin_layout Standard
33544 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33546 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33550 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33552 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33553 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33557 \begin_inset space ~
33561 \begin_inset space ~
33565 \begin_inset space ~
33574 \begin_inset space ~
33578 \begin_inset space ~
33582 \begin_inset space ~
33586 \begin_inset space ~
33590 \begin_inset space ~
33594 \begin_inset space ~
33599 enables the change tracking option
33602 \begin_inset space ~
33606 \begin_inset space ~
33610 \begin_inset space ~
33615 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33618 \begin_layout Section
33619 International Support
33620 \begin_inset Index idx
33623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 International support
33632 \begin_layout Standard
33633 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33634 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33635 up LyX to use them:
33636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33638 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33645 \begin_layout Standard
33646 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33653 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33660 \begin_layout Subsection
33662 \begin_inset Index idx
33665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33672 \begin_inset Index idx
33675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33676 Document ! Settings
33682 \begin_inset Index idx
33685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33686 Document ! Language
33694 \begin_layout Standard
33697 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33698 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33701 dialog lets you set
33703 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33708 \begin_layout Standard
33713 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33717 \begin_inset space ~
33722 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33723 For details about the different encoding options see section
33724 \begin_inset space ~
33728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33730 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33737 \begin_layout Subsection
33738 Keyboard mapping configuration
33739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33741 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33748 \begin_layout Standard
33749 If you have for example a U.
33750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33753 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33754 can use an alternate keymap.
33755 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33756 use an Italian keymap.
33759 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33760 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33761 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33764 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33771 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33776 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33777 which one you want to use.
33780 \begin_layout Standard
33781 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33782 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33783 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33787 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33788 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33789 one to support the characters you want.
33790 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33797 \begin_layout Chapter
33800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33802 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33809 \begin_layout Standard
33810 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33811 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33812 topic inside the user's guide.
33815 \begin_layout Section
33817 \begin_inset Index idx
33820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33834 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33837 \begin_layout Subsection
33841 \begin_layout Standard
33842 Creates a new document.
33845 \begin_layout Subsection
33849 \begin_layout Standard
33850 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33851 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33852 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33855 \begin_layout Subsection
33859 \begin_layout Standard
33863 \begin_layout Subsection
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33869 Click there on a file to open it.
33872 \begin_layout Subsection
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33877 Closes the current document.
33880 \begin_layout Subsection
33884 \begin_layout Standard
33885 Closes all opened documents.
33888 \begin_layout Subsection
33892 \begin_layout Standard
33893 Saves the actual document.
33896 \begin_layout Subsection
33900 \begin_layout Standard
33901 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33904 \begin_layout Subsection
33908 \begin_layout Standard
33909 Saves all opened documents.
33912 \begin_layout Subsection
33916 \begin_layout Standard
33917 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33920 \begin_layout Subsection
33924 \begin_layout Standard
33925 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33926 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33927 It is described in the section
33929 Version Control in LyX
33933 Additional Features
33938 \begin_layout Subsection
33942 \begin_layout Standard
33943 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33944 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33946 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33950 When using the menu entry
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33958 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33970 \begin_inset space ~
33975 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33976 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33979 \begin_layout Subsection
33981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33990 \begin_layout Standard
33991 You can export your document to various file formats.
33992 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33993 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33994 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33997 \begin_layout Standard
33998 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34006 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34013 \begin_layout Description
34019 \begin_inset space ~
34026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34033 yX format of the special LyX
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34037 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34038 \begin_inset Newline newline
34041 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34044 \begin_layout Description
34045 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34051 \begin_layout Description
34053 \begin_inset space ~
34056 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34062 \begin_layout Description
34063 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34064 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34065 files paths or file names in your document.
34066 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34073 \begin_layout Description
34074 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34075 in files paths or file names
34078 \begin_layout Description
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34094 eX) DVI-format using the program
34098 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34101 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34109 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34117 \begin_layout Description
34119 \begin_inset space ~
34122 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34126 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34131 \begin_layout Description
34132 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34136 \begin_layout Description
34138 \begin_inset space ~
34142 \begin_inset space ~
34145 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34149 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34157 \begin_layout Description
34164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34172 \begin_inset space ~
34183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34196 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34201 \begin_layout Description
34208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34221 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34222 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34226 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34229 \begin_layout Description
34236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34249 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34250 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34258 \begin_layout Description
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34297 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34302 \begin_layout Description
34304 \begin_inset space ~
34308 \begin_inset space ~
34317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34326 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34327 music notation software
34332 \begin_layout Description
34339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34349 \begin_inset space ~
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34356 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34357 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34358 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34361 \begin_layout Description
34368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34381 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34397 represent the version number)
34400 \begin_layout Description
34407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34416 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34419 \begin_layout Description
34420 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34425 \begin_layout Description
34426 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34428 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34431 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34435 \begin_layout Description
34439 \begin_inset space ~
34444 PDF-format using the program
34448 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34451 \begin_layout Description
34455 \begin_inset space ~
34462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 PDF-format using the program
34475 , produces PDF-files directly
34478 \begin_layout Description
34482 \begin_inset space ~
34487 PDF-format using the program
34491 , produces PDF-files directly
34494 \begin_layout Description
34498 \begin_inset space ~
34503 PDF-format using the program
34507 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34510 \begin_layout Description
34514 \begin_inset space ~
34521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34530 PDF-format using the program
34534 , produces PDF-files directly
34537 \begin_layout Description
34541 \begin_inset space ~
34549 \begin_layout Description
34553 \begin_inset space ~
34557 \begin_inset space ~
34562 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34563 and then exported as text using the program
34568 \begin_layout Description
34573 PostScript format using the program
34578 \begin_layout Description
34579 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34580 programming language
34593 it is possible to use
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 If one of the menu entries
34608 \begin_inset space ~
34617 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34618 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34619 \begin_inset space ~
34623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34625 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34630 \begin_inset Index idx
34633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34634 Reconfiguration of LyX
34642 \begin_layout Subsection
34646 \begin_layout Standard
34647 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34648 format or send it to a printer.
34649 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34650 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34656 For more information have a look at section
34657 \begin_inset space ~
34661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34663 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34670 \begin_layout Subsection
34674 \begin_layout Standard
34675 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34676 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34677 prefix, see section
34678 \begin_inset space ~
34682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34684 reference "sec:Paths"
34689 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34698 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34699 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34700 \begin_inset space ~
34704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34706 reference "sub:Converters"
34713 \begin_layout Subsection
34714 New and Close Window
34717 \begin_layout Standard
34718 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34721 \begin_layout Subsection
34725 \begin_layout Standard
34726 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34729 \begin_layout Section
34731 \begin_inset Index idx
34734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34743 \begin_layout Subsection
34747 \begin_layout Standard
34748 Described in section
34749 \begin_inset space ~
34753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34755 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34762 \begin_layout Subsection
34763 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34766 \begin_layout Standard
34767 Described in section
34768 \begin_inset space ~
34772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34774 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34781 \begin_layout Subsection
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34786 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34787 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34790 \begin_layout Subsection
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 Selects the whole document.
34798 \begin_layout Subsection
34799 Find & Replace (Quick)
34802 \begin_layout Standard
34803 Described in section
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34810 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34817 \begin_layout Subsection
34818 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34821 \begin_layout Standard
34822 Described in section
34823 \begin_inset space ~
34827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34829 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34836 \begin_layout Subsection
34837 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34840 \begin_layout Standard
34841 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34845 \begin_layout Subsection
34849 \begin_layout Standard
34850 Described in section
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34857 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34864 \begin_layout Subsection
34866 \begin_inset Index idx
34869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34870 Paragraph ! Settings
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34880 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34884 \begin_layout Standard
34885 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34886 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34892 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34893 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34895 \begin_inset space ~
34903 \begin_layout Subsection
34907 \begin_layout Standard
34908 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34909 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34910 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34914 \begin_layout Standard
34915 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34917 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34918 The properties of tables are described in section
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34925 reference "sec:Tables"
34929 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34930 \begin_inset space ~
34934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34936 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34943 \begin_layout Subsection
34944 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34947 \begin_layout Standard
34948 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34950 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34951 \begin_inset space ~
34955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34957 reference "sec:Nesting"
34962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34964 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34971 \begin_layout Section
34973 \begin_inset Index idx
34976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34985 \begin_layout Standard
34986 At the bottom of the
34990 menu the opened documents are listed.
34993 \begin_layout Subsection
34994 Open/Close all Insets
34997 \begin_layout Standard
34998 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35001 \begin_layout Subsection
35002 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35005 \begin_layout Standard
35006 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35009 \begin_layout Standard
35010 Math macros are described in the
35017 \begin_layout Subsection
35021 \begin_layout Standard
35022 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35029 reference "sec:Navigating"
35034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35036 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35043 \begin_layout Subsection
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35050 \begin_inset space ~
35054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35056 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35063 \begin_layout Subsection
35067 \begin_layout Standard
35068 Opens a window showing console messages.
35069 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35073 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35074 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35077 \begin_layout Subsection
35079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35081 name "sub:Toolbars"
35086 \begin_inset Index idx
35089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35100 All toolbars and the
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35108 can be turned on and off.
35113 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35137 \begin_inset space ~
35142 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35146 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35153 \begin_layout Standard
35158 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35162 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35163 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35164 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35165 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35166 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35177 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35184 \begin_layout Subsection
35188 \begin_layout Standard
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35196 \begin_inset space ~
35200 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35217 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35220 \begin_inset space ~
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35236 \begin_inset space ~
35240 \begin_inset space ~
35245 will split it horizontally.
35246 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35247 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35248 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35249 three or more documents at the same time.
35250 To close a split view, use the menu
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35257 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_layout Subsection
35269 \begin_layout Standard
35270 Closes a split view.
35273 \begin_layout Subsection
35277 \begin_layout Standard
35278 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35279 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35280 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35281 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35282 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35285 \begin_layout Section
35287 \begin_inset Index idx
35290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35299 \begin_layout Subsection
35303 \begin_layout Standard
35304 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35311 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35322 \begin_layout Subsection
35324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35326 name "sub:Special-Character"
35333 \begin_layout Standard
35334 Here you can insert the following characters:
35337 \begin_layout Description
35342 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35344 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35345 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35346 You can get a complete display by checking
35349 \begin_inset space ~
35355 \begin_inset Newline newline
35359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35367 Not all characters will be visible in the
35371 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35379 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35383 ) can display every character.
35391 \begin_layout Description
35392 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35396 \begin_layout Description
35398 \begin_inset space ~
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35405 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35412 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35419 \begin_layout Description
35421 \begin_inset space ~
35424 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35427 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35428 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35434 \begin_layout Description
35436 \begin_inset space ~
35439 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35442 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35443 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35449 \begin_layout Description
35451 \begin_inset space ~
35454 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35458 \begin_layout Description
35460 \begin_inset space ~
35463 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35467 \begin_layout Description
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35472 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35478 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35484 \begin_layout Description
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35489 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35493 \begin_layout Description
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset Index idx
35502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35509 \begin_inset Index idx
35512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35513 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35518 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35519 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35521 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35526 \begin_inset Index idx
35529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35530 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35536 \begin_inset Newline newline
35539 More information about this feature can be found in the
35545 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35551 \begin_layout Subsection
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35556 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35559 \begin_layout Description
35560 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35561 \begin_inset script superscript
35563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35572 \begin_layout Description
35573 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35574 \begin_inset script subscript
35576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35585 \begin_layout Description
35587 \begin_inset space ~
35590 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35597 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35604 \begin_layout Description
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35609 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35616 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35623 \begin_layout Description
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35628 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35629 \begin_inset space ~
35633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35635 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35642 \begin_layout Description
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35647 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35653 \begin_inset space \space{}
35656 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35657 An example from the LyX
35662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35665 To insert a fraction use the command
35670 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35674 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35683 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35690 \begin_layout Description
35692 \begin_inset space ~
35695 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35702 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35709 \begin_layout Description
35711 \begin_inset space ~
35714 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35715 \begin_inset space ~
35719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35721 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35728 \begin_layout Description
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35733 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35740 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35747 \begin_layout Description
35748 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35755 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35762 \begin_layout Description
35764 \begin_inset space ~
35767 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35768 \begin_inset space ~
35772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35774 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35781 \begin_layout Description
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35786 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35793 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35800 \begin_layout Description
35802 \begin_inset space ~
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35809 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35816 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35823 \begin_layout Description
35825 \begin_inset space ~
35828 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35829 as described in section
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35836 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35843 \begin_layout Description
35845 \begin_inset space ~
35848 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35855 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35862 \begin_layout Description
35864 \begin_inset space ~
35867 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35868 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35870 \begin_inset space ~
35874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35876 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35883 \begin_layout Description
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35888 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35889 \begin_inset space ~
35893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35895 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35902 \begin_layout Description
35904 \begin_inset space ~
35908 \begin_inset space ~
35911 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35918 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35925 \begin_layout Subsection
35929 \begin_layout Standard
35930 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35951 are described in section
35952 \begin_inset space ~
35956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35958 reference "sec:toc"
35967 is described in section
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35974 reference "sec:Index"
35982 is described in section
35983 \begin_inset space ~
35987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35989 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35995 BibTeX Bibliography
35997 is described in section
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36004 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36011 \begin_layout Subsection
36015 \begin_layout Standard
36016 To insert floats, as described in section
36017 \begin_inset space ~
36021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36023 reference "sec:Floats"
36027 and in detail the chapter
36034 \begin_inset space ~
36042 \begin_layout Subsection
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36047 To insert notes, described in section
36048 \begin_inset space ~
36052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36054 reference "sec:Notes"
36061 \begin_layout Subsection
36065 \begin_layout Standard
36066 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36068 Branches are described in section
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36075 reference "sec:Branches"
36082 \begin_layout Subsection
36086 \begin_layout Standard
36087 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36088 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36090 An example is the document class
36091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36098 with three custom insets.
36101 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36105 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36111 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36114 \begin_layout Subsection
36116 \begin_inset Index idx
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36128 \begin_layout Standard
36129 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36131 For more information see chapter
36133 External Document Parts
36136 \begin_inset space ~
36142 \begin_layout Subsection
36144 \begin_inset Index idx
36147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36156 \begin_layout Standard
36157 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36158 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36173 \begin_layout Subsection
36177 \begin_layout Standard
36182 dialog as described in section
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36189 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36196 \begin_layout Subsection
36200 \begin_layout Standard
36205 as described in section
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36212 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36219 \begin_layout Subsection
36223 \begin_layout Standard
36228 as described in section
36229 \begin_inset space ~
36233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36235 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36242 \begin_layout Subsection
36244 \begin_inset Index idx
36247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36254 \begin_inset Index idx
36257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36258 Longtables ! Caption
36266 \begin_layout Standard
36267 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36268 Floats are described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "sec:Floats"
36279 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36294 \begin_layout Subsection
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36299 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36306 reference "sec:Index"
36313 \begin_layout Subsection
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36325 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36332 \begin_layout Subsection
36336 \begin_layout Standard
36337 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36338 Tables are described in section
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36345 reference "sec:Tables"
36349 and in detail in the chapter
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36364 \begin_layout Subsection
36368 \begin_layout Standard
36374 Graphics are described in section
36375 \begin_inset space ~
36379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36381 reference "sec:Graphics"
36388 \begin_layout Subsection
36392 \begin_layout Standard
36393 Inserts a URL as described in section
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36400 reference "sub:URLs"
36407 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36419 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36426 \begin_layout Subsection
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36438 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36445 \begin_layout Subsection
36449 \begin_layout Standard
36450 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36457 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36464 \begin_layout Subsection
36468 \begin_layout Standard
36469 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36470 title or caption of a float.
36471 Inserts a short title as described in section
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36478 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36485 \begin_layout Subsection
36489 \begin_layout Standard
36490 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36504 \begin_layout Subsection
36506 \begin_inset Index idx
36509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36518 \begin_layout Standard
36519 Inserts a program listings box.
36520 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36522 Program Code Listings
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36535 \begin_layout Subsection
36539 \begin_layout Standard
36540 Inserts the actual date.
36541 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36543 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36551 \begin_inset space ~
36559 \begin_layout Subsection
36563 \begin_layout Standard
36564 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36571 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36578 \begin_layout Section
36580 \begin_inset Index idx
36583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36592 \begin_layout Standard
36593 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36597 of the current document.
36598 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36601 \begin_layout Subsection
36605 \begin_layout Standard
36606 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36607 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36608 to jump, for example, between section
36609 \begin_inset space ~
36613 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36617 2.5 and use the submenu
36620 \begin_inset space ~
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36647 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36651 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36657 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36660 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36668 \begin_inset space ~
36673 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36681 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36684 \begin_layout Subsection
36685 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36688 \begin_layout Standard
36689 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36693 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36698 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36699 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36700 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36716 \begin_layout Subsection
36720 \begin_layout Standard
36721 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36724 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36726 \begin_inset space ~
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36739 manual for a detailed description.
36742 \begin_layout Section
36744 \begin_inset Index idx
36747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36756 \begin_layout Subsection
36760 \begin_layout Standard
36761 Change Tracking is described in section
36762 \begin_inset space ~
36766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36768 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36790 \begin_layout Standard
36791 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36793 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36794 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36795 to the clipboard or update the view.
36796 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
36800 Start Appendix Here
36803 \begin_layout Standard
36804 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36805 as described in section
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36812 reference "sec:Appendices"
36819 \begin_layout Subsection
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36829 default output format for the document (menu
36831 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36832 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36833 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36835 \begin_inset space ~
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36845 \begin_inset space ~
36849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36851 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36855 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36857 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36858 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36863 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36868 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36886 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36890 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36891 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36893 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36894 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36899 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36901 \begin_inset space ~
36904 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36908 \begin_inset space ~
36912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36914 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36919 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36920 The default output format is
36923 \begin_inset space ~
36931 \begin_layout Subsection
36932 View (Other Formats)
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36937 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36938 actual document with an external program.
36939 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36940 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36941 All possible formats are listed in section
36942 \begin_inset space ~
36946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36948 reference "sub:Export"
36953 You should at least see the menu entry
36958 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36959 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36966 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36971 \begin_inset Index idx
36974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36975 Reconfiguration of LyX
36983 \begin_layout Standard
36984 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36985 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36987 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36988 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36993 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36995 \begin_inset space ~
36998 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37008 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37013 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37016 \begin_layout Subsection
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_layout Standard
37025 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37026 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37029 \begin_layout Subsection
37030 Update (Other Formats)
37033 \begin_layout Standard
37034 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37035 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37038 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 View Master Document
37042 \begin_layout Standard
37043 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37064 manual for more information on this topic).
37065 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37066 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37079 generates the output of the whole book, while
37083 will just output the chapter alone.
37086 \begin_layout Standard
37087 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37088 in the document settings (menu
37090 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37091 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37092 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37110 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37114 ) or in the preferences (menu
37116 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37117 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37119 \begin_inset space ~
37122 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37127 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37145 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37152 \begin_layout Subsection
37153 Update Master Document
37156 \begin_layout Standard
37157 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37178 manual for more information on this topic).
37179 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37180 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37185 in the document settings (menu
37187 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37188 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37189 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset space ~
37205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37207 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37211 ) or in the preferences (menu
37213 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37214 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37219 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37224 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37242 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37249 \begin_layout Subsection
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 Un/compresses the current document.
37257 \begin_layout Subsection
37261 \begin_layout Standard
37262 The document settings are described in appendix
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37269 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37276 \begin_layout Section
37278 \begin_inset Index idx
37281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37290 \begin_layout Subsection
37294 \begin_layout Standard
37295 Spell checking is explained in section
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37302 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37309 \begin_layout Subsection
37313 \begin_layout Standard
37314 The thesaurus is described in section
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37321 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37328 \begin_layout Subsection
37330 \begin_inset Index idx
37333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37340 \begin_inset Index idx
37343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37352 \begin_layout Standard
37353 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37354 the highlighted document part.
37357 \begin_layout Subsection
37362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37370 \begin_inset Index idx
37373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37382 \begin_layout Standard
37383 Generates with the help of the program
37387 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37388 This feature is not available on Windows.
37391 \begin_layout Subsection
37396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37404 \begin_inset Index idx
37407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37416 \begin_layout Standard
37417 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37427 to see the full filename paths.
37430 \begin_layout Subsection
37432 \begin_inset Index idx
37435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37444 \begin_layout Standard
37445 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37452 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37459 \begin_layout Subsection
37461 \begin_inset Index idx
37464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37476 Reconfiguration of LyX
37480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37493 \begin_inset Index idx
37496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37497 Reconfiguration of LyX
37505 \begin_layout Standard
37506 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37507 needs; see also section
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37514 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37521 \begin_layout Subsection
37525 \begin_layout Standard
37530 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37537 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37544 \begin_layout Section
37546 \begin_inset Index idx
37549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37558 \begin_layout Standard
37559 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37561 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37574 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37575 found by LyX (see also section
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37582 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37609 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37613 \begin_layout Section
37615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37617 name "sec:Toolbars"
37624 \begin_layout Standard
37625 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37632 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37639 \begin_layout Standard
37640 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37641 This is described in the
37643 Additional Features
37648 \begin_layout Subsection
37650 \begin_inset Index idx
37653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37662 \begin_layout Standard
37663 \begin_inset Graphics
37664 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37672 \begin_layout Standard
37673 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 \begin_inset Note Note
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37701 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37706 manual for more information.
37714 \begin_layout Standard
37715 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37721 \begin_layout Standard
37722 \begin_inset Tabular
37723 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37724 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37725 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37726 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 \begin_inset Graphics
37733 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37747 pull-down box for the environments
37760 \begin_layout Standard
37761 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37767 \begin_layout Standard
37769 \begin_inset Tabular
37770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37771 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37772 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37773 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37797 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37827 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37857 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37873 arg "dialog-show print"
37881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37887 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37903 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37917 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37947 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37977 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38007 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38037 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38067 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38083 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38097 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38123 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38137 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38165 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38180 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38208 Emphasize text, function of the
38210 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38212 \begin_inset space ~
38215 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38245 Set text to noun style, function of the
38247 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38249 \begin_inset space ~
38252 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38270 arg "textstyle-apply"
38278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 Format text using the current settings in the
38284 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38289 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38322 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38324 \begin_inset space ~
38333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38342 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38370 arg "tabular-insert"
38378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38400 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38412 Toggle outline window on/off,
38414 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38442 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38482 \begin_layout Subsection
38484 \begin_inset Index idx
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 \begin_inset Graphics
38498 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38506 \begin_layout Standard
38507 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38518 \begin_layout Standard
38519 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38525 \begin_layout Standard
38526 \begin_inset Tabular
38527 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38528 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38529 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38530 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 arg "layout Enumerate"
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38594 arg "layout Itemize"
38602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38648 arg "layout Description"
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 arg "depth-increment"
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38695 \begin_inset space ~
38704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 arg "depth-decrement"
38721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38729 \begin_inset space ~
38733 \begin_inset space ~
38742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38751 arg "float-insert figure"
38759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38765 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38766 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 arg "float-insert table"
38790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38796 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38797 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38843 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38857 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38873 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38917 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38937 arg "nomencl-insert"
38945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38951 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38971 arg "footnote-insert"
38979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39001 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39015 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39017 \begin_inset space ~
39026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39050 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 \begin_inset space ~
39072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39081 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39095 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39155 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39172 \begin_inset space ~
39181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39190 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39204 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39205 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39235 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39236 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39238 \begin_inset space ~
39247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 arg "dialog-show character"
39264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39272 \begin_inset space ~
39275 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39291 arg "layout-paragraph"
39299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39325 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39353 \begin_layout Subsection
39354 View/Update Toolbar
39355 \begin_inset Index idx
39358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 Toolbar ! View / Update
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 \begin_inset Graphics
39369 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39376 \begin_layout Standard
39377 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39383 \begin_layout Standard
39384 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 \begin_inset Tabular
39397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39398 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39399 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39400 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39424 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 arg "buffer-update"
39448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39470 arg "master-buffer-view"
39478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39484 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39486 \begin_inset space ~
39495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39504 arg "master-buffer-update"
39512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39518 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39520 \begin_inset space ~
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39542 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39556 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39557 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39558 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39559 Synchronize with Output
39565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39570 \begin_inset Graphics
39571 filename ../images/view-others.png
39573 groupId toolbarbuttons
39584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39590 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39591 View (Other Formats)
39597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 \begin_inset Graphics
39603 filename ../images/update-others.png
39605 groupId toolbarbuttons
39614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39620 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39621 Update (Other Formats)
39634 \begin_layout Standard
39635 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39639 \begin_layout Subsection
39643 \begin_layout Standard
39644 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39651 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39655 , the table toolbar
39656 \begin_inset Index idx
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39673 manual and the math macro toolbar
39674 \begin_inset Index idx
39677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 \begin_layout Chapter
39691 The Document Settings
39692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39694 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39699 \begin_inset Index idx
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 Document ! Settings
39711 \begin_layout Standard
39715 \begin_inset space ~
39720 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39721 is called with the menu
39723 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39727 You can save your document settings as default with the
39729 Save as Document Defaults
39731 button in any dialog.
39732 This will create a template named
39736 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39740 \begin_layout Standard
39745 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39746 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39749 \begin_layout Standard
39750 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39751 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39752 to find the one you are looking for.
39753 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39754 the submenus of the dialog.
39756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39760 \begin_inset space \space{}
39764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39771 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39772 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39773 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39776 \begin_layout Section
39780 \begin_layout Standard
39781 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39783 Document classes are described in section
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39790 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39798 \begin_layout Standard
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39807 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39811 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39812 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39814 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39823 \begin_layout Standard
39824 Some classes use special class options by default.
39825 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39829 and you can decide to use them or not.
39830 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39831 recommended you leave them untouched.
39836 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39841 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39842 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39848 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39849 \begin_inset Newline newline
39854 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39857 \begin_inset Newline newline
39860 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39866 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39868 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39880 \begin_layout Standard
39885 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39886 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39887 document is opened without its master.
39888 This way child documents are always compilable.
39889 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39896 \begin_inset space ~
39904 \begin_layout Standard
39905 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39915 \begin_inset Index idx
39918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39919 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39925 \begin_inset Index idx
39928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39934 for cross-references, see section
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39941 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39948 \begin_layout Section
39952 \begin_layout Standard
39953 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39954 Please refer to the section
39957 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39970 manual for details.
39973 \begin_layout Section
39977 \begin_layout Standard
39978 Modules are explained in section
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39985 reference "sub:Modules"
39992 \begin_layout Section
39996 \begin_layout Standard
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40004 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40011 \begin_layout Section
40015 \begin_layout Standard
40016 The document font settings are described in section
40017 \begin_inset space ~
40021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40023 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40030 \begin_layout Section
40034 \begin_layout Standard
40035 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40047 \begin_inset space ~
40052 and whether it should be a
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40060 can also be specified here.
40063 \begin_layout Standard
40064 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40066 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40068 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40071 \begin_layout Section
40075 \begin_layout Standard
40076 This dialog is described in sections
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40083 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40090 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40097 \begin_layout Section
40101 \begin_layout Standard
40102 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40109 reference "sub:Margins"
40116 \begin_layout Section
40118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40120 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40125 \begin_inset Index idx
40128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40129 Language ! Encoding
40137 \begin_layout Standard
40138 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40139 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40140 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40141 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40142 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40143 known for a particular character).
40147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40148 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40153 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40158 manual for details.
40166 \begin_layout Standard
40167 If you use the option
40171 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40172 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40173 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40174 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40175 exactly one encoding.
40176 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40181 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40182 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40183 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40184 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40185 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40190 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40191 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40192 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40193 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40194 engines to standard LaTeX.
40195 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40196 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40249 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40254 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40258 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40261 \begin_layout Standard
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40270 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40280 The possible settings are:
40283 \begin_layout Description
40284 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40286 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40287 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40297 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40304 \begin_layout Description
40305 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40306 format you will use.
40307 In many cases this will be
40312 \begin_inset Index idx
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40322 If the newer package
40327 \begin_inset Index idx
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40331 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40336 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40337 this package will be used instead of
40344 \begin_layout Description
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40357 would be more appropriate.
40360 \begin_layout Description
40361 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40362 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40366 (for German texts), type in
40369 \begin_inset Newline newline
40374 usepackage{ngerman}
40377 \begin_layout Description
40378 None will not use a language package.
40379 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40382 \begin_layout Standard
40383 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40386 \begin_layout Description
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40403 , but the LaTeX-package
40408 \begin_inset Index idx
40411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40418 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40419 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40420 languages in TeX code.
40423 \begin_layout Description
40424 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40425 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40426 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40429 \begin_layout Description
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40438 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40441 \begin_layout Description
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40450 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40453 \begin_layout Description
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40458 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40461 \begin_layout Description
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40470 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40471 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40474 \begin_layout Description
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40483 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40487 \begin_layout Description
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40496 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40497 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40500 \begin_layout Description
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40513 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_layout Description
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40533 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40534 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40537 \begin_layout Description
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40546 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40547 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40548 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40559 \begin_layout Description
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40568 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40569 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40570 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40571 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40582 \begin_layout Description
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40591 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40594 \begin_layout Description
40596 \begin_inset space ~
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40603 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40606 \begin_layout Description
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40615 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40618 \begin_layout Description
40620 \begin_inset space ~
40623 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40626 \begin_layout Description
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40631 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40634 \begin_layout Description
40636 \begin_inset space ~
40640 \begin_inset space ~
40643 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40646 \begin_layout Description
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40658 \begin_layout Description
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40667 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40670 \begin_layout Description
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_layout Description
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40691 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40696 \begin_inset Index idx
40699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40700 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40705 , when using this, set the document language to
40710 \begin_layout Description
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40719 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40723 , when using this, set the document language to
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_layout Description
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40741 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40746 \begin_inset Index idx
40749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40750 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40755 , when using this, set the document language to
40760 \begin_layout Description
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40769 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40773 , when using this, set the document language to
40778 \begin_layout Description
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40787 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40791 , when using this, set the document language to
40796 \begin_layout Description
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40801 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40804 \begin_layout Description
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40817 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40820 \begin_layout Description
40822 \begin_inset space ~
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset space ~
40833 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40834 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40835 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40838 \begin_layout Description
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_layout Description
40852 \begin_inset space ~
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40859 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40860 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40863 \begin_layout Description
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40869 \begin_inset space ~
40872 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40877 \begin_inset Index idx
40880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40881 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40886 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40889 \begin_layout Description
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40898 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40906 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40911 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40913 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40916 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40925 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40930 \begin_inset Index idx
40933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40934 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40939 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40942 \begin_layout Description
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40952 \begin_inset Index idx
40955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40956 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40962 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40966 \begin_layout Description
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40979 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40980 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_layout Description
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset space ~
40999 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41000 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41001 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41005 \begin_layout Description
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41018 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41019 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41022 \begin_layout Section
41024 \begin_inset Index idx
41027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41034 \begin_inset Index idx
41037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 \begin_inset Index idx
41047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41048 Color ! Shaded boxes
41054 \begin_inset Index idx
41057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41058 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41066 \begin_layout Standard
41067 Here you can alter the font color for the
41071 (default: black), for
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41079 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41083 (default: white) and for
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41096 sets the color back to the default.
41099 \begin_layout Standard
41100 Clicking any button showing
41108 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41109 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41110 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41111 later more quickly.
41114 \begin_layout Standard
41115 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41124 out note appears blue in the output.)
41132 \begin_layout Standard
41133 Note, if you change the
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41141 font color and use the option
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41149 in the document settings under
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41157 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41164 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41171 \begin_layout Standard
41172 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41178 \begin_layout Standard
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41191 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41196 Code after a forced page break:
41199 \begin_layout Itemize
41200 For the page color:
41201 \begin_inset Newline newline
41208 pagecolor{color name}
41211 \begin_layout Itemize
41212 For the text color:
41213 \begin_inset Newline newline
41223 \begin_layout Standard
41224 You are restricted to one of
41260 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset Newline newline
41276 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41277 names to refer to them:
41280 \begin_layout Itemize
41286 \begin_inset Newline newline
41291 page_backgroundcolor
41294 \begin_layout Itemize
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41304 \begin_inset Newline newline
41312 \begin_layout Itemize
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41322 \begin_inset Newline newline
41330 \begin_layout Itemize
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \begin_inset Newline newline
41348 \begin_layout Standard
41349 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 Cells of the Embedded
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41360 \begin_layout Section
41364 \begin_layout Standard
41365 Here you can adjust the
41369 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41373 as described in section
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41380 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41387 \begin_layout Section
41391 \begin_layout Standard
41392 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41397 \begin_inset Index idx
41400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41401 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41411 \begin_inset Index idx
41414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41415 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41423 Sectioned bibliography
41425 using the LaTeX package
41430 \begin_inset Index idx
41433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41434 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41439 and you can select a
41443 for the generation of the bibliography.
41444 For a further description see section
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41451 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41458 \begin_layout Section
41462 \begin_layout Standard
41463 Here you can define the
41467 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41475 reference "sec:Index"
41482 \begin_layout Section
41486 \begin_layout Standard
41487 The PDF properties are explained in section
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41494 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41501 \begin_layout Section
41505 \begin_layout Standard
41506 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41511 \begin_inset Index idx
41514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41515 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41525 \begin_inset Index idx
41528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41539 \begin_inset Index idx
41542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41543 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41553 \begin_inset Index idx
41556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41557 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41562 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41565 \begin_layout Description
41566 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41567 ensure that you have enabled
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41578 \begin_layout Description
41579 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41594 \begin_layout Description
41595 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41606 \begin_layout Description
41607 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41609 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41618 \begin_layout Section
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41623 The float placement options are described in the section
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41634 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_layout Section
41646 \begin_layout Standard
41647 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41649 Program Code Listings
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41662 \begin_layout Section
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41667 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41675 set to be used and set the
41680 The itemize environment is described in section
41681 \begin_inset space ~
41685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41687 reference "sec:Itemize"
41694 \begin_layout Standard
41695 You can furthermore specify a
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41703 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41704 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41711 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41717 \begin_inset space \space{}
41721 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41731 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41732 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41735 \begin_layout Standard
41736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41744 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41747 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41748 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41750 \begin_inset space ~
41756 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41760 usepackage{textcomp}
41763 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41767 usepackage{amssymb}
41777 \begin_layout Section
41781 \begin_layout Standard
41782 Branches are described in section
41783 \begin_inset space ~
41787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41789 reference "sec:Branches"
41796 \begin_layout Section
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41800 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41811 \begin_layout Description
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41820 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41840 View Master Document
41841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41848 Update Master Document
41849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41856 menu or the toolbar.
41857 The default is set in
41859 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41860 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41865 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41875 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41882 \begin_layout Description
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41891 Output settings for the menu
41893 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41895 \begin_inset space ~
41901 For a detailed description see section
41903 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_layout Description
41918 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41925 Options offers settings for the export format
41931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41949 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41950 \begin_inset space ~
41953 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41962 settings are described in detail in section
41964 Math Output in XHTML
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41978 \begin_inset space ~
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41987 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41990 \begin_layout Section
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42005 \begin_layout Standard
42006 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42007 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42008 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42009 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42013 \begin_layout Standard
42014 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42015 \begin_inset space ~
42019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42021 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42028 \begin_layout Chapter
42034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42036 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42041 \begin_inset Index idx
42044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42053 \begin_layout Standard
42054 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42056 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42060 It has the following submenus.
42063 \begin_layout Section
42067 \begin_layout Subsection
42071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42072 User Interface File
42073 \begin_inset Index idx
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42077 Customization ! of toolbars
42083 \begin_inset Index idx
42086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42087 Customization ! of menus
42095 \begin_layout Standard
42096 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42097 interface (ui) file.
42098 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42106 \begin_layout Description
42111 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42114 \begin_layout Description
42121 the menu entries in popup context menus
42124 \begin_layout Description
42129 specifies the toolbar buttons
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42133 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42134 and edit the entries.
42137 \begin_layout Standard
42138 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42150 entries must be finished with an explicit
42175 and in the case of the
42176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42188 The syntax for the entries is:
42191 \begin_layout Standard
42192 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42220 \begin_layout Standard
42222 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42225 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42227 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42248 \begin_layout Standard
42249 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42255 \begin_layout Standard
42256 For example, assuming you use the menu
42258 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42261 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42265 \begin_layout Standard
42266 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42290 \begin_layout Standard
42292 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42307 to have the sixth bookmark.
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42314 \begin_inset space ~
42319 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42320 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42324 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42335 \begin_layout Standard
42338 Enable tool tips in main work area
42340 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42348 \begin_layout Standard
42351 Restore window layouts and geometries
42353 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42354 in the last LyX session.
42357 \begin_layout Standard
42360 Restore cursor positions
42362 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42366 \begin_layout Standard
42369 Load opened files from last session
42371 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42377 Clear all session information
42379 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42380 of last opened documents, etc.).
42383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42387 name "sub:Backup documents"
42392 \begin_inset Index idx
42395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42407 Backup original documents when saving
42409 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42410 it was saved the last time.
42411 It is stored in the
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42426 reference "sec:Paths"
42430 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42433 \begin_inset space ~
42439 The backup file has the file extension
42440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42454 \begin_layout Standard
42457 Backup documents, every
42459 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42462 \begin_layout Standard
42465 Save documents compressed by default
42467 always saves files in a compressed format.
42470 \begin_layout Standard
42475 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42478 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42488 \begin_layout Standard
42491 Open documents in tabs
42493 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42501 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42513 reference "sec:Paths"
42517 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42523 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42525 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42531 Single close-tab button
42533 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42536 \begin_inset Graphics
42537 filename ../images/closetab.png
42544 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42545 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42548 \begin_layout Standard
42549 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42557 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42565 \begin_layout Subsection
42567 \begin_inset Index idx
42570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42579 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42586 \begin_layout Standard
42587 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42590 \begin_layout Standard
42591 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42599 This section only deals with the fonts
42604 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42607 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42608 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42620 By default, LyX uses
42636 (depends on the system) as its
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42655 \begin_layout Standard
42656 You can change the font size with the
42663 \begin_layout Standard
42668 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42673 points have the size of 1
42674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42678 \begin_inset space ~
42682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42684 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42689 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42694 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42701 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42711 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42713 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42714 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42715 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42716 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42718 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42725 \begin_layout Subsection
42727 \begin_inset Index idx
42730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42737 \begin_inset Index idx
42740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42749 \begin_layout Standard
42750 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42751 the list and selecting the
42758 \begin_layout Standard
42759 By checking the option
42763 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42766 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42767 \begin_inset space ~
42771 \begin_inset space ~
42776 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42779 \begin_layout Subsection
42781 \begin_inset Index idx
42784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42793 \begin_layout Standard
42794 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42797 \begin_layout Standard
42802 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42803 This feature is described in section
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42810 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42817 \begin_layout Standard
42818 Checking the option
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42834 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42837 \begin_layout Section
42839 \begin_inset Index idx
42842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42851 \begin_layout Subsection
42855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42862 Cursor follows scrollbar
42864 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42868 \begin_layout Standard
42869 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42870 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42871 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42874 \begin_layout Standard
42877 Scroll below end of document
42879 is self-explanatory.
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42883 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42890 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42892 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42893 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42899 Sort environments alphabetically
42901 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42907 Group environments by their category
42909 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42912 \begin_layout Standard
42917 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42933 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42938 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42939 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42943 \begin_layout Subsection
42945 \begin_inset Index idx
42948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42955 \begin_inset Index idx
42958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42959 Settings ! Shortcuts
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42972 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42973 Several binding files are available, among them:
42976 \begin_layout Description
42977 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42980 \begin_layout Description
42981 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42993 \begin_layout Description
42994 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43005 \begin_layout Standard
43006 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43011 , and binding files for special languages.
43012 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43017 \begin_inset space \space{}
43021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43029 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43033 \begin_layout Standard
43034 Some binding files, like
43038 , only have a limited scope.
43039 When looking at the end of the file
43043 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43054 \begin_inset space ~
43059 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43060 in the selected key binding file.
43063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43067 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43072 \begin_inset Index idx
43075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43076 Key Bindings ! Editing
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43085 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43086 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43087 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43090 Show key-bindings containing
43093 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43094 Insert there for example as keyword
43095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43102 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43103 functions that contain
43104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43112 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43113 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43117 that you will find in the
43124 \begin_layout Standard
43125 For example, to add the shortcut
43133 , select the function and press the
43138 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43139 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43143 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43144 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43145 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43146 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43147 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43152 \begin_layout Standard
43153 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43157 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43159 The syntax of the entries is:
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43186 \begin_layout Subsection
43188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43190 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43195 \begin_inset Index idx
43198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43205 \begin_inset Index idx
43208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43209 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43218 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43219 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43220 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43221 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43224 \begin_inset space ~
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43233 and select the keyboard map file named
43240 \begin_layout Standard
43249 keyboard map and, if you use the
43253 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43256 arg "keymap-primary"
43262 arg "keymap-secondary"
43265 respectively or toggle between them with
43268 arg "keymap-toggle"
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43275 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43292 \begin_layout Standard
43293 You can also specify the mouse
43295 Wheel scrolling speed
43298 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43302 \begin_layout Standard
43310 \begin_inset space ~
43314 \begin_inset space ~
43319 you can select a key for zooming.
43320 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43323 \begin_layout Subsection
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 Input completion is described in section
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43335 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43342 \begin_layout Section
43344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43351 \begin_inset Index idx
43354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 \begin_inset Index idx
43364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43373 \begin_layout Standard
43374 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43376 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43379 \begin_layout Description
43381 \begin_inset space ~
43384 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43385 It is the default when you
43396 \begin_inset space ~
43404 \begin_layout Description
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43409 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43411 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43417 \begin_inset space ~
43425 \begin_layout Description
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43430 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43436 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43440 \begin_inset Newline newline
43444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43456 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43464 \begin_layout Description
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43470 \begin_inset Index idx
43473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43480 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43481 \begin_inset space ~
43485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43487 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43495 will be used to save the backups.
43496 \begin_inset Newline newline
43499 Backup files have the ending
43500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43510 \begin_layout Description
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43526 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43527 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43528 \begin_inset Newline newline
43535 You add a BibTeX-database
43540 You can edit this file with the program
43549 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43558 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43563 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43564 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43570 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43571 \begin_inset Newline newline
43574 The pipe is also used for the
43579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43585 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43590 \begin_inset Newline newline
43593 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43594 \begin_inset Newline newline
43610 \begin_layout Description
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43615 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43618 \begin_layout Description
43620 \begin_inset space ~
43623 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43624 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43625 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43628 \begin_layout Description
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43633 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43639 You only need to specify it if you are using
43643 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43649 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43653 \begin_layout Description
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43658 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43659 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43660 where to find it on the system.
43661 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43662 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43671 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43672 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43675 \begin_layout Description
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43680 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43681 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43683 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43685 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43686 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43687 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43688 scanned for the input files.
43689 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43690 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43691 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43692 compilation may fail for some documents.
43695 \begin_layout Section
43699 \begin_layout Standard
43700 Here you can insert your
43709 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43717 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43721 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43724 \begin_layout Section
43726 \begin_inset Index idx
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43730 Language ! Settings
43736 \begin_inset Index idx
43739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43740 Settings ! Language
43748 \begin_layout Subsection
43750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43752 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43759 \begin_layout Description
43761 \begin_inset space ~
43765 \begin_inset space ~
43768 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43769 You can find its actual translation status here:
43770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43772 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43779 \begin_layout Description
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43784 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43786 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43787 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43804 The most widespread language package is
43809 \begin_inset Index idx
43812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43818 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43819 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43820 alternative language package
43825 \begin_inset Index idx
43828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43829 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43834 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43835 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43841 The available selections are described in section
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43848 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43855 \begin_layout Description
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43860 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43861 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43862 An example is the start command
43868 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43888 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43893 \begin_layout Description
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43903 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43904 command toggles the package on and off.
43907 \begin_layout Description
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43916 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43920 \begin_layout Description
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43929 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43930 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43931 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43932 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43939 \begin_layout Description
43941 \begin_inset space ~
43944 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43946 When this option is not set, the
43949 \begin_inset space ~
43954 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43955 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43966 \begin_layout Description
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43980 When it is not set, the
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43988 is set to the end of the document.
43991 \begin_layout Description
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43997 \begin_inset space ~
44000 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44001 language will be underlined in blue.
44004 \begin_layout Description
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44013 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44014 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44017 \begin_layout Description
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44022 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44023 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44024 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44025 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44028 \begin_layout Subsection
44032 \begin_layout Standard
44033 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44040 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44047 \begin_layout Section
44051 \begin_layout Subsection
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44067 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44068 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44076 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44079 \begin_layout Description
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44085 \begin_inset Index idx
44088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44095 \begin_inset Index idx
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44099 Settings ! Date format
44104 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44105 \begin_inset Newline newline
44109 \begin_inset Flex URL
44112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44114 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44120 \begin_inset Newline newline
44123 For example the format
44124 \begin_inset Newline newline
44128 \begin_inset Newline newline
44131 prints the date as day/month/year.
44134 \begin_layout Description
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44143 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44146 \begin_layout Description
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44151 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44153 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44155 \begin_inset space ~
44161 For a detailed description see section
44163 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44176 \begin_layout Subsection
44178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44185 \begin_inset Index idx
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44195 \begin_inset Index idx
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44207 \begin_layout Description
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44212 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44217 The name will be used when the
44222 \begin_inset Newline newline
44226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44234 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44242 \begin_layout Description
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44247 command is the command LyX
44248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44255 LaTeX uses for printing.
44263 \begin_layout Description
44265 \begin_inset space ~
44269 \begin_inset space ~
44272 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44273 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44274 of the program that provides the
44281 \begin_layout Description
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44287 \begin_inset space ~
44291 \begin_inset space ~
44294 printer This option works only for the
44299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44311 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44312 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44315 \begin_layout Subsection
44320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44330 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44335 \begin_inset Index idx
44338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 \begin_layout Description
44349 \begin_inset space ~
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44371 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44376 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44397 are used for Cyrillic.
44398 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44411 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44412 LyX sets up in the background.
44413 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44416 \begin_layout Description
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44422 \begin_inset space ~
44425 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44430 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44433 \begin_layout Description
44435 \begin_inset space ~
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44443 \begin_inset space ~
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44450 options They only have an effect when the program
44454 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44457 \begin_layout Standard
44458 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44459 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44460 manuals of the applications.
44463 \begin_layout Description
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44468 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44475 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44482 \begin_layout Description
44484 \begin_inset space ~
44487 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44494 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44501 \begin_layout Description
44503 \begin_inset space ~
44506 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44507 \begin_inset space ~
44511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44513 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44520 \begin_layout Description
44525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44536 command Command for the program
44540 that is described in the section
44546 Additional Features
44551 \begin_layout Standard
44552 There are additionally the following options:
44555 \begin_layout Description
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44561 \begin_inset space ~
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44569 \begin_inset space ~
44573 \begin_inset space ~
44576 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44594 to separate folders.
44595 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44596 \begin_inset Index idx
44599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44606 \begin_inset Index idx
44609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44618 \begin_layout Description
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44632 \begin_inset space ~
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44643 changes Removes all manually set
44649 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44650 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44652 \begin_inset space ~
44657 dialog when changing the document class.
44660 \begin_layout Section
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44666 \begin_inset Index idx
44669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44678 \begin_layout Subsection
44680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44682 name "sub:Converters"
44687 \begin_inset Index idx
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44699 \begin_layout Standard
44700 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44701 from one format to another.
44702 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44703 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44710 \begin_inset space ~
44715 field and press the
44720 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44729 drop-down list, modify the
44733 field and press the
44740 \begin_layout Standard
44743 Converter File Cache
44749 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44751 Maximum Age (in days
44754 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44755 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44758 \begin_layout Standard
44759 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44760 definition, is described in the section
44771 \begin_layout Subsection
44773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44775 name "sec:File-Formats"
44780 \begin_inset Index idx
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 \begin_inset Index idx
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 \begin_layout Standard
44803 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44812 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44815 \begin_layout Standard
44816 You can also define the
44818 Default output format
44820 that is used when you use
44822 View, Update, View Master Document
44826 Update Master Document
44832 menu or the toolbar.
44835 \begin_layout Standard
44836 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44847 \begin_layout Standard
44848 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44849 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44850 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44851 This is done by specifying a
44856 More about this is described in the section
44867 \begin_layout Chapter
44868 Units available in LyX
44869 \begin_inset Index idx
44872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44881 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44888 \begin_layout Standard
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44896 reference "tab:Units"
44900 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44903 \begin_layout Standard
44904 \begin_inset Float table
44910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44911 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44929 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44937 \begin_inset Tabular
44938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44939 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45092 scaled point (65536
45093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45153 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45208 % of original image width
45215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45422 \begin_layout Chapter
45424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45426 name "chap:Credits"
45433 \begin_layout Standard
45434 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45435 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45438 \begin_layout Itemize
45441 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45444 \begin_layout Itemize
45450 \begin_layout Itemize
45456 \begin_layout Itemize
45462 \begin_layout Itemize
45468 \begin_layout Itemize
45474 \begin_layout Itemize
45480 \begin_layout Itemize
45486 \begin_layout Itemize
45489 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45492 \begin_layout Itemize
45498 \begin_layout Itemize
45504 \begin_layout Itemize
45510 \begin_layout Itemize
45516 \begin_layout Itemize
45522 \begin_layout Itemize
45528 \begin_layout Itemize
45534 \begin_layout Itemize
45540 \begin_layout Itemize
45542 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45551 \begin_layout Standard
45552 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45555 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45562 \begin_layout Bibliography
45563 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45564 LatexCommand bibitem
45571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45574 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45579 \begin_inset Newline newline
45583 \begin_inset Flex URL
45586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45588 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45596 \begin_layout Bibliography
45597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45598 LatexCommand bibitem
45599 key "latexcompanion"
45603 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45605 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45608 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45611 \begin_layout Bibliography
45612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45613 LatexCommand bibitem
45618 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45621 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45624 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45627 \begin_layout Bibliography
45628 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45629 LatexCommand bibitem
45636 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45639 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45642 \begin_layout Bibliography
45643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45644 LatexCommand bibitem
45656 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45659 \begin_layout Bibliography
45660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45661 LatexCommand bibitem
45667 \begin_inset Newline newline
45671 \begin_inset Flex URL
45674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45676 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45684 \begin_layout Bibliography
45685 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45686 LatexCommand bibitem
45692 \begin_inset Newline newline
45696 \begin_inset Flex URL
45699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45709 \begin_layout Bibliography
45710 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45711 LatexCommand bibitem
45717 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45719 name "Documentation"
45720 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45729 \begin_inset Newline newline
45733 \begin_inset Flex URL
45736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45738 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45746 \begin_layout Bibliography
45747 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45748 LatexCommand bibitem
45754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45756 name "Documentation"
45757 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45761 how to use the program
45766 \begin_inset Newline newline
45770 \begin_inset Flex URL
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45783 \begin_layout Bibliography
45784 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45785 LatexCommand bibitem
45791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45793 name "Documentation"
45794 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45803 \begin_inset Newline newline
45807 \begin_inset Flex URL
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45820 \begin_layout Bibliography
45821 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45822 LatexCommand bibitem
45828 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45830 name "Documentation"
45831 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45840 \begin_inset Newline newline
45844 \begin_inset Flex URL
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45849 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45857 \begin_layout Bibliography
45858 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45859 LatexCommand bibitem
45865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45867 name "Documentation"
45868 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45872 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45873 \begin_inset Newline newline
45877 \begin_inset Flex URL
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45890 \begin_layout Bibliography
45891 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45892 LatexCommand bibitem
45898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45900 name "Documentation"
45901 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45905 of the LaTeX-package
45910 \begin_inset Index idx
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45920 \begin_inset Newline newline
45924 \begin_inset Flex URL
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45929 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45937 \begin_layout Bibliography
45938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45939 LatexCommand bibitem
45945 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45947 name "Documentation"
45948 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45952 of the LaTeX-package
45957 \begin_inset Index idx
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45961 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45967 \begin_inset Newline newline
45971 \begin_inset Flex URL
45974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
45984 \begin_layout Bibliography
45985 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45986 LatexCommand bibitem
45992 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45994 name "Documentation"
45995 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
45999 of the LaTeX-package
46004 \begin_inset Index idx
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46014 \begin_inset Newline newline
46018 \begin_inset Flex URL
46021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46023 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46031 \begin_layout Bibliography
46032 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46033 LatexCommand bibitem
46039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46041 name "Documentation"
46042 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46046 of the LaTeX-package
46051 \begin_inset Index idx
46054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46061 \begin_inset Newline newline
46065 \begin_inset Flex URL
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46078 \begin_layout Bibliography
46079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46080 LatexCommand bibitem
46086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46088 name "Documentation"
46089 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46093 of the LaTeX-package
46098 \begin_inset Index idx
46101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46102 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46108 \begin_inset Newline newline
46112 \begin_inset Flex URL
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46117 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46125 \begin_layout Bibliography
46126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46127 LatexCommand bibitem
46133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46135 name "Documentation"
46136 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46140 of the LaTeX-package
46145 \begin_inset Index idx
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46155 \begin_inset Newline newline
46159 \begin_inset Flex URL
46162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46172 \begin_layout Bibliography
46173 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46174 LatexCommand bibitem
46180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46182 name "Documentation"
46183 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46187 of the LaTeX-package
46192 \begin_inset Index idx
46195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46202 \begin_inset Newline newline
46206 \begin_inset Flex URL
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46211 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46219 \begin_layout Bibliography
46220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46221 LatexCommand bibitem
46227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46230 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46234 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46235 \begin_inset Newline newline
46239 \begin_inset Flex URL
46242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46244 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46252 \begin_layout Bibliography
46253 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46254 LatexCommand bibitem
46260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46263 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46267 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46268 \begin_inset Newline newline
46272 \begin_inset Flex URL
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46285 \begin_layout Bibliography
46286 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46287 LatexCommand bibitem
46293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46296 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46300 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46301 \begin_inset Newline newline
46305 \begin_inset Flex URL
46308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46310 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46318 \begin_layout Bibliography
46319 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46320 LatexCommand bibitem
46326 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46329 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46333 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46334 \begin_inset Newline newline
46338 \begin_inset Flex URL
46341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46343 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46351 \begin_layout Bibliography
46352 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46353 LatexCommand bibitem
46359 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46362 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46366 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46367 \begin_inset Newline newline
46371 \begin_inset Flex URL
46374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46384 \begin_layout Bibliography
46385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46386 LatexCommand bibitem
46392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46395 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46399 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46400 \begin_inset Newline newline
46404 \begin_inset Flex URL
46407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46417 \begin_layout Bibliography
46418 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46419 LatexCommand bibitem
46425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46428 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46432 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46433 \begin_inset Newline newline
46437 \begin_inset Flex URL
46440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46450 \begin_layout Bibliography
46451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46452 LatexCommand bibitem
46458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46461 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46465 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46466 \begin_inset Newline newline
46470 \begin_inset Flex URL
46473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46483 \begin_layout Bibliography
46484 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46485 LatexCommand bibitem
46491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46494 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46498 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46499 \begin_inset Newline newline
46503 \begin_inset Flex URL
46506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46508 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46516 \begin_layout Bibliography
46517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46518 LatexCommand bibitem
46524 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46527 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46531 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46532 \begin_inset Newline newline
46536 \begin_inset Flex URL
46539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46541 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46549 \begin_layout Bibliography
46550 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46551 LatexCommand bibitem
46557 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46560 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46564 about new features in
46569 \begin_inset Newline newline
46573 \begin_inset Flex URL
46576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46578 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46586 \begin_layout Standard
46587 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46621 \begin_inset Note Note
46624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46631 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46632 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46633 bibliography is the second one:
46641 \begin_layout Standard
46642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46643 LatexCommand bibtex
46644 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46645 options "biblio/alphadin"
46652 \begin_layout Standard
46653 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46656 \begin_layout Standard
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46658 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46665 LatexCommand printindex